VOLVO S80 Owner's manual - Volvo Carsnew.volvocars.com/.../2010_S80/2010S80OwnersManual.pdf · Introduction Important information 9 this manual may not be available in all mar-kets

VOLVO S80

Owner's manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trustthat you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, anautomobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. Weencourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipmentdescriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We alsourge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times inthis (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operatea vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or anyimpairment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety andemission standards. For further information please contactyour retailer, or:

In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer CareCenter

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.

Contents

4

0000 Introduction

Important information................................. 8Important warnings................................... 10Environment.............................................. 11

0101 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 14Reporting safety defects........................... 15Seat belts ................................................. 16Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .. . . 19Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 24Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 28Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) ................... 30Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 31Crash mode.............................................. 33Child safety............................................... 34Child restraint systems............................. 36Infant seats............................................... 38Convertible seats...................................... 40Booster cushions...................................... 42ISOFIX lower anchors............................... 43Top tether anchors.................................... 44Child restraint registration and recalls...... 45Integrated booster cushion....................... 46Child safety locks...................................... 48

0202 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade....................... 52Valet locking ............................................. 59Keyless drive............................................. 60Locks........................................................ 63Alarm......................................................... 66

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

0303 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls.......................... 72Ignition modes.......................................... 80Seats......................................................... 82Seats S80 Executive ............................... 87Steering wheel.......................................... 89Lighting..................................................... 90Wipers and washers................................. 96Power windows......................................... 98Mirrors..................................................... 100Power moonroof..................................... 102HomeLink® Wireless Control System*... 104Starting the engine.................................. 107Transmission........................................... 111Brakes..................................................... 114Parking brake.......................................... 116 04

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages............................. 122Climate system....................................... 126Audio system.......................................... 133Bluetooth® hands-free connection......... 147Trip computer......................................... 153Compass................................................. 155Stability system....................................... 156Active chassis system–Four C................ 158Cruise control.......................................... 159Collision warning with Auto-brake*......... 161Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 167Distance alert ......................................... 174Driver Alert System* ............................... 177Park assist*............................................. 182Blind Spot Information System*.............. 185Passenger compartment convenience.. . 189Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive ........................................ 192

0505 During your trip

Driving recommendations....................... 196Refueling................................................. 200Loading................................................... 204Towing a trailer....................................... 207Emergency towing.................................. 209

Contents

6

0606 Maintenance and

specifications

Volvo maintenance.................................. 214Maintaining your car............................... 215Hood and engine compartment.............. 217Engine oil................................................ 218Fluids...................................................... 220Replacing bulbs...................................... 222Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 230Battery..................................................... 232Fuses...................................................... 235Wheels and tires..................................... 244Vehicle care............................................. 266Label information.................................... 271Specifications......................................... 273Volvo programs....................................... 280 07

07 Index

Index....................................................... 282

Contents

7

Introduction

Important information

8

About this manual

• Before you operate your vehicle for the firsttime, please familiarize yourself with theinformation in chapter 3.

• Information contained in the balance of themanual is extremely useful and should beread after operating the vehicle for the firsttime.

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described inthis manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

NOTE

• All information, illustrations and specifi-cations contained in this manual arebased on the latest product informationavailable at the time of publication.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change spec-ifications or design without notice andwithout incurring obligation.

• Do not export your Volvo to anothercountry before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and emissioncontrol requirements. In some cases itmay be difficult or impossible to complywith these requirements. Modificationsto the emission control system(s) mayrender your Volvo not certifiable forlegal operation in the U.S., Canada andother countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,unseen damage may affect its driveabilityand safety.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such asair bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,adaptive steering columns, and button cellbatteries may contain Perchlorate material.Special handling may apply for service orvehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Points to keep in mind

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

• Do not export your Volvo to another coun-try before investigating that country'sapplicable safety and exhaust emissionrequirements. In some cases it may be dif-ficult or impossible to comply with theserequirements. Modifications to the emis-sion control system(s) may render yourVolvo not certifiable for legal operation inthe U.S., Canada and other countries.

• All information, illustrations and specifica-tions contained in this manual are based onthe latest product information available atthe time of publication. Please note thatsome vehicles may be equipped differ-ently, depending on special legal require-ments. Optional equipment described in

Introduction

Important information

9

this manual may not be available in all mar-kets.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change specifi-cations or design without notice and with-out incurring obligation.

Vehicle event data (Black box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systemsemploy computers that monitor, and sharewith each other, information about your vehi-cle's operation. One or more of these comput-ers may store what they monitor, either duringnormal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-crash event. Stored information may be readand used by:

• Volvo Car Corporation

• service and repair facilities

• law enforcement or government agencies

• others who may assert a legal right toknow, or who obtain your consent to knowsuch information.

Introduction

Important warnings

10

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everythingpossible to ensure his or her own safety andthe safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractionsis part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activitiesthat are not directly related to controlling thevehicle in the driving environment. Your newVolvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-ture-rich entertainment and communicationsystems. These include hands-free cellular tel-ephones, navigation systems, and multipur-pose audio systems. You may also own otherportable electronic devices for your own con-venience. When used properly and safely, theyenrich the driving experience. Improperly used,any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide thefollowing warning that reflects the strong Volvoconcern for your safety. Never use these devi-ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way thatdistracts you from the task of driving safely.Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Inaddition to this general warning, we offer thefollowing guidance regarding specific newerfeatures that may be found in your vehicle

• Never use a hand-held cellular telephonewhile driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while thevehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-tion system, set and make changes to yourtravel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

• Never program your audio system whilethe vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-sets with the vehicle parked, and use yourprogrammed presets to make radio usequicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or personaldigital assistants while the vehicle is mov-ing.

Accessory installation

• We strongly recommend that Volvo ownersinstall only genuine, Volvo-approvedaccessories, and that accessory installa-tions be performed only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested toensure compatibility with the performance,safety, and emission systems in your vehi-cle. Additionally, a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician knows whereaccessories may and may not be safelyinstalled in your Volvo. In all cases, pleaseconsult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before installing any acces-sory in or on your vehicle.

• Accessories that have not been approvedby Volvo may or may not be specificallytested for compatibility with your vehicle.Additionally, an inexperienced installermay not be familiar with some of your car'ssystems.

• Any of your car's performance and safetysystems could be adversely affected if youinstall accessories that Volvo has not tes-ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-cle.

• Damage caused by unapproved orimproperly installed accessories may notbe covered by your new vehicle warranty.See your Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet for more warrantyinformation. Volvo assumes no responsi-bility for death, injury, or expenses thatmay result from the installation of non-gen-uine accessories.

Introduction

Environment

11

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,we care about the environment in which we alllive. Caring for the environment means aneveryday involvement in reducing our environ-mental impact. Volvo's environmental activitiesare based on a holistic view, which means weconsider the overall environmental impact of aproduct throughout its complete life cycle. Inthis context, design, production, product use,and recycling are all important considerations.In production, Volvo has partly or completelyphased out several chemicals including CFCs,lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; andreduced the number of chemicals used in ourplants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce intoproduction a three-way catalytic converter witha Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygensensor, in 1976. The current version of thishighly efficient system reduces emissions ofharmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from theexhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% andthe search to eliminate the remaining emis-sions continues. Volvo is the only automobilemanufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits forthe air conditioning system of all models as farback as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels arebringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi-

cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recyclingis the next critical step in completing the lifecycle. The metal content is about 75% of thetotal weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi-cle among the most recycled industrial prod-ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con-trolled recycling, dismantling information isavailable for all Volvo models. For Volvo, allhomogeneous plastic parts weighing morethan 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter-national symbols that indicate how the com-ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In additionto continuous environmental refinement ofconventional gasoline-powered internal com-bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking atadvanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-ner in the work to lessen the car's impact onthe environment. To reduce your vehicle'senvironmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-omy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenanceschedule in your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-sible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician as soon as possible for inspec-tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after thevehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-relatedwaste such as used motor oil, used batter-ies, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please usegenuine Volvo car care products. All Volvocar care products are formulated to beenvironmentally friendly.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the state of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addition, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

G020871

12

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 14Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 15Seat belts ............................................................................................... 16Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 19Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 24Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 28Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) ................................................................. 30Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... 31Crash mode............................................................................................ 33Child safety............................................................................................. 34Child restraint systems........................................................................... 36Infant seats.............................................................................................. 38Convertible seats.................................................................................... 40Booster cushions.................................................................................... 42ISOFIX lower anchors............................................................................. 43Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 44Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 45Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 46Child safety locks.................................................................................... 48

01SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

14

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concerndates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolledoff the production line. Three-point seat belts(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were designed intoVolvo vehicles long before it was fashionableor required by government regulation.

We will not compromize our commitment tosafety. We continue to seek out new safetyfeatures and to refine those already in our vehi-cles. You can help. We would appreciate hear-ing your suggestions about improving automo-bile safety. We also want to know if you everhave a safety concern with your vehicle. Call usin the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on howold you are but rather on:

• How well you see.

• Your ability to concentrate.

• How quickly you make decisions understress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to helpyou cope with the ever changing traffic envi-ronment.

• Never drink and drive.

• If you are taking any medication, consultyour physician about its potential effectson your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.

• Have your eyes checked regularly.

• Keep your windshield and headlightsclean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start toleave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, andweather conditions, particularly withregard to stopping distance.

01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

15

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your retailer, or VolvoCars of North America, LLC. To con-tact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from:

http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that ifyour vehicle is covered under a serv-ice campaign, safety or emissionrecall or similar action, it should becompleted as soon as possible.Please check with your local retaileror Volvo Cars of North America, LLCif your vehicle is covered under theseconditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Carsof Canada Corp.

To contact Transport Canada, call(800) 333 – 0510, or (613) 993 – 9851 if you arecalling from the Ottawa region.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

16

General information

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-erly restrained, using an infant, car, or boosterseat determined by age, weight and height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in thefront seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatoryfor occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensionersthat reduce slack in the belts. These preten-sioners are triggered in situations where thefront or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-tain impacts from the rear. The front seat beltsalso include a tension reducing device which,

in the event of a collision, limits the peak forcesexerted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latchplate into the receptacle until a distinct click isheard. The seat belt retractor is normally"unlocked" and you can move freely, providedthat the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

The retractor will lock up as follows:

• if the belt is pulled out rapidly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the vehicle is leaning excessively

• when driving in turns.

To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keep theseat belt taut. See page 35 for more infor-mation regarding the Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR).

When wearing the seat belt remember:

• The belt should not be twisted or turned.

• The lap section of the belt must be posi-tioned low on the hips (not pressing againstthe abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolledup into its retractor and that the shoulderand lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red sectionon the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting thevehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fullyafter being unbuckled. If necessary, guide thebelt back into the retractor slot.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are ingood condition. Use water and a mild deter-gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanismfunction as follows: attach the seat belt and pullrapidly on the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than oneoccupant. Never wear the shoulder portionof the belt under the arm, behind the backor otherwise out of position. Such use couldcause injury in the event of an accident. Asseat belts lose much of their strength whenexposed to violent stretching, they shouldbe replaced after any collision, even if theyappear to be undamaged.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

��

17

WARNING

• Never repair the belt yourself; have thiswork done by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

• Any device used to induce slack into theshoulder belt portion of the three-pointbelt system will have a detrimentaleffect on the amount of protection avail-able to you in the event of a collision.

• The seat back should not be tilted toofar back. The shoulder belt must be tautin order to function properly.

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children who have outgrown thesedevices sit in the rear seat with the seatbelt properly fastened.

Seat belt reminder

G01

7726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audiblesignal, an indicator light near the rearview mir-ror and a symbol in the instrument panel thatalert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten theirseat belts. The audible signal and warning lightwill be on for a total of 6 seconds from the timethe ignition is switched on, regardless of

whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while thevehicle is in motion, the audible signal andwarning light will be active for a total of 6 sec-onds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has twoadditional functions:

• It provides information about which seatbelts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-sage will appear in the information displaywhen a belt is being used. This messagewill disappear after approximately 6 sec-onds or can be erased by pressing theREAD button on the left steering wheellever.

• It also provides a reminder if one of theoccupants of the rear seat has unbuckledhis/her seat belt while the vehicle is inmotion. A visual and audible signal will begiven. These signals will stop when theseat belt has been re-buckled or can bestopped by pressing the READ button.

The message in the information display canalways be accessed, even if it has been erased,by pressing the READ button to display storedmessages.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

18

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G02

0998

The seat belt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section should wrapover the shoulder then be routed between thebreasts and to the side of the belly. The lapsection should lay flat over the thighs and aslow as possible under the belly. It must neverbe allowed to ride upward. Remove all slackfrom the belt and ensure that it fits close to thebody without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means they mustbe able to easily operate the foot pedals andsteering wheel). Within this context, theyshould strive to position the seat with as large

a distance as possible between their belly andthe steering wheel.

Child seats

Please refer to page 36 for information onsecuring child seats with the seat belts.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

��

19

General information

G02

2831

Warning symbols in the instrument panel

As an enhancement to the three-point seatbelts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRSconsists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-bags, side impact airbags, a front passengeroccupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur-tains. All of these systems are monitored by theSRS control module. An SRS warning light inthe instrument panel (see the illustration) illu-minates when the ignition is in modes I, II, orIII, and will normally go out after approximately6 seconds if no faults are detected in the sys-tem.

Where applicable, a text message will also bedisplayed when the SRS warning light illumi-nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

properly, the general warning symbol illumi-nates and a text message will be displayed.See also page 74 and page 76 for moreinformation about indicator and warning sym-bols.

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light stays on afterthe engine has started or if it illuminateswhile you are driving, have the vehicleinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

• Never try to repair any component orpart of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. All work onthese systems should be performed bya trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has been subjected to floodconditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehicle) or if yourvehicle has become flood-damaged in anyway, do not attempt to start the vehicle orinsert the remote key into the ignition slotbefore disconnecting the battery (seebelow). This may cause airbag deploymentwhich could result in personal injury. Havethe vehicle towed to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for repairs.

Automatic transmission:

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Follow the instructions for manuallyoverriding the shiftlock system on page112.

Please be aware that overriding the shiftlocksystem does not release the steering wheellock.

01 Safety


20

Front airbags

G01

8665

The front airbag system

The front airbags supplement the three-pointseat belts. For these airbags to provide theprotection intended, seat belts must be wornat all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-tion sensors that activate the gas generators,causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogengas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners alsodeploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entireprocess, including inflation and deflation of theairbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated bySRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheelpad and above the glove compartment, and bydecals on both sun visors and on the front andfar right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded andlocated in the steering wheel hub.

The passenger's side front airbag is foldedbehind a panel located above the glove com-partment.

WARNING

• The airbags in the vehicle are designedto be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-ment for–the three-point seat belts. Formaximum protection, wear seat belts atall times. Be aware that no system canprevent all possible injuries that mayoccur in an accident.

• Never drive a vehicle with a steeringwheel-mounted airbag with your handson the steering wheel pad/airbag hous-ing.

• The front airbags are designed to helpprevent serious injury. Deploymentoccurs very quickly and with consider-able force. During normal deploymentand depending on variables such asseating position, one may experienceabrasions, bruises, swellings, or otherinjuries as a result from deployment ofone or both of the airbags.

• When installing any accessory equip-ment, make sure that the front airbagsystem is not damaged. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function.

01 Safety


��

21

Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deployduring certain frontal or front-angular col-lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed andobject impacted. The airbags may alsodeploy in certain non-frontal collisionswhere rapid deceleration occurs.

• The SRS sensors, which trigger the frontairbags, are designed to react to both theimpact of the collision and the inertialforces generated by it, and to determine ifthe intensity of the collision is sufficient forthe seat belt pretensioners and/or airbagsto be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate thefront airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixedobject at a low speed, the front airbags willnot necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in aside impact collision, in a collision from therear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodyworkdoes not reliably indicate if the airbagsshould have deployed or not.

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat occupants under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened1.

• Never drive with the airbags deployed.The fact that they hang out can impairthe steering of your vehicle. Othersafety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when theairbags are deployed can cause skinand eye irritation in the event of pro-longed exposure.

Should you have questions about any compo-nent in the SRS system, please contact atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianor Volvo Customer Support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.


175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information see page 24.

01 Safety


22

NOTE

• Deployment of front airbags occurs onlyone time during an accident. In a colli-sion where deployment occurs, the air-bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-vate. Some noise occurs and a smallamount of powder is released. Therelease of the powder may appear assmoke-like matter. This is a normalcharacteristic and does not indicate fire.

• Volvo's front airbags use special sen-sors that are integrated with the frontseat buckles. The point at which the air-bag deploys is determined by whetheror not the seat belt is being used, as wellas the severity of the collision.

• Collisions can occur where only one ofthe airbags deploys. If the impact is lesssevere, but severe enough to present aclear injury risk, the airbags are trig-gered at partial capacity. If the impact ismore severe, the airbags are triggeredat full capacity.

Airbag decals

G03

2244

Airbag decal on the far right end of the passeng-er's dashboard

G00

8335

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

G03

2527

Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard

01 Safety


23

WARNING

• Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat. Volvo recom-mends that ALL occupants (adults andchildren) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the back seat ofany vehicle with a passenger-side frontairbag.

• Occupants in the front passenger's seatmust never sit on the edge of the seat,sit leaning toward the instrument panelor otherwise sit out of position.

• The occupant's back must be as uprightas comfort allows and be against theseat back with the seat belt properlyfastened.

• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not onthe dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

• No objects or accessory equipment,e.g. dashboard covers, may be placedon, attached to, or installed near the airbag hatch (the area above the glovecompartment) or the area affected byairbag deployment (see the illustrationon page 20).

• There should be no loose articles, suchas coffee cups on the floor, seat, ordashboard area.

• Never try to open the airbag cover onthe steering wheel or the passenger'sside dashboard. This should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

24

General information

2

2

G01

7724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front

airbag

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adultsand children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of anyvehicle with a front passenger side airbag, andbe properly restrained for their size and weight.For child safety recommendations, seepage 35.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) isdesigned to meet the regulatory requirementsof Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (willnot inflate) the passenger's side front airbagunder certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger's seat and seat belt. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger's side front airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or disabled (will notinflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-senger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,or has small/medium objects in the frontseat,

• the system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat that isinstalled according to the manufacturer'sinstructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraintthat is installed according to the manufac-turer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies the frontpassenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp which will illuminate and stay onto remind you that the passenger's side front

airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp is located in the overheadconsole, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWSindicator light will go on for up to 10 secondswhile the system performs a self-diagnostictest.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on

• The SRS warning light (see page 19) willcome on and stay on

• The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF

SERVICE URGENT will be displayed inthe information display.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and indi-cated as described, be aware that the pas-senger's side front airbag will not deploy inthe event of a collision. In this case, the SRSsystem and Occupant Weight Sensorshould be inspected by a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician as soon aspossible.

01 Safety


��

25

WARNING

• Never try to open, remove, or repair anycomponents in the OWS system. Thiscould result in system malfunction.Maintenance or repairs should only becarried out by an a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• The front passenger's seat should notbe modified in any way. This couldreduce pressure on the seat cushion,which might interfere with the OWS sys-tem's function.

Passeng-er's seatoccu-pancy sta-tus

OWS indi-cator lightstatus

Passeng-er's sidefront air-bag status

Seat unoc-cupied

OWS indica-tor lightlights up.

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-bled

Seat occu-pied by lowweightoccupant/objectA

OWS indica-tor lightlights up

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-bled

Seat occu-pied byheavy occu-pant/object

OWS indica-tor light isnot lit

Passenger'sside frontairbag ena-bled

A Volvo recommends that children always be properlyrestrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Donot assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabledunless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there isany doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air-bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)the passenger's side front airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front passenger's seat.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampwill be off and remain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible thatthe person isn't sitting properly in the seat. Ifthis happens:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seatback in an upright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with the per-son's legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable the pas-senger's frontal airbag.

• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp remains on even after this, the personshould be advised to ride in the rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWSclassification capability. It does not indicateOWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle inany way to accommodate a disability, forexample by altering or adapting the driver's orfront passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-tems, please contact Volvo at:

01 Safety


26

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.


175 Gordon Baker Road North York, OntarioM2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

• No objects that add to the total weighton the seat should be placed on thefront passenger's seat. If a child isseated in the front passenger's seatwith any additional weight, this extraweight could cause the OWS system toenable the airbag, which might cause itto deploy in the event of a collision,thereby injuring the child.

• The seat belt should never be wrappedaround an object on the front passeng-er's seat. This could interfere with theOWS system's function.

• The front passenger's seat belt shouldnever be used in a way that exerts morepressure on the passenger than normal.This could increase the pressure exer-ted on the weight sensor by a child, andcould result in the airbag being enabled,which might cause it to deploy in theevent of a collision, thereby injuring thechild.

WARNING

• Keep the following points in mind withrespect to the OWS system. Failure tofollow these instructions couldadversely affect the system's functionand result in serious injury to the occu-pant of the front passenger's seat:

• The full weight of the front seat passen-ger should always be on the seat cush-ion. The passenger should never lifthim/herself off the seat cushion usingthe armrest in the door or the centerconsole, by pressing the feet on thefloor, by sitting on the edge of the seatcushion, or by pressing against thebackrest in a way that reduces pressureon the seat cushion. This could causeOWS to disable the front, passenger'sside airbag.

01 Safety


27

WARNING

• Do not place any type of object on thefront passenger's seat in such a waythat jamming, pressing, or squeezingoccurs between the object and the frontseat, other than as a direct result of thecorrect use of the Automatic LockingRetractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 35).

• No objects should be placed under thefront passenger's seat. This could inter-fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

28

General information

G03

2949

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (frontseats only)

As an enhancement to the structural sideimpact protection built into your vehicle, it isalso equipped with Side Impact ProtectionSystem (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to helpincrease occupant protection in the event ofcertain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-bags are designed to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

G02

4377

SIPS airbag deployment

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occursonly on the side of the vehicle affected by theimpact. The airbags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations.

G03

2254

SIPS decal on the front of the driver's door open-ing

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occursonly on the side of the vehicle affected bythe impact. The airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gen-erator, the side airbag modules built into theoutboard sides of both front seat backrests,and electronic sensors/wiring.

01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

29

WARNING

• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-tection System and the three-point seatbelt system. It is not designed to deployduring collisions from the front or rear ofthe vehicle or in rollover situations.

• The use of seat covers on the front seatsmay impede SIPS airbag deployment.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SIPS airbag systemor in the area affected by SIPS airbagdeployment.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the SIPS airbag system. Thisshould be done only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• In order for the SIPS airbag to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the occupants of thevehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) 01

30

General information

This system consists of inflatable curtainslocated along the sides of the roof liners,stretching from the center of both front sidewindows to the rear edge of the rear side doorwindows. It is designed to help protect theheads of the occupants of the front seats andthe occupant of the outboard rear seating posi-tions in certain side impact collisions.

In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-tain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPSairbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remainsinflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

• The VIC system is a supplement to theSide Impact Protection System. It is notdesigned to deploy during collisionsfrom the front or rear of the vehicle or inrollover situations.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the VIC system. This should bedone only by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Never hang heavy items from the ceilinghandles. This could impede deploymentof the Inflatable Curtain.

• The rear seat should not be loaded to alevel higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below theupper edge of the rear side windows.Objects placed higher than this levelcould impede the function of the VolvoInflatable Curtain.

WARNING

In order for the VIC to provide its best pro-tection, both front seat occupants and bothoutboard rear seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat belt prop-erly fastened; adults using the seat belt andchildren using the proper child restraint sys-tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.Children must never be allowed in the frontpassenger seat, see page 35 for guide-lines. Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants in anaccident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

��

31

General information

G02

1018

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) –

front seats only

The WHIPS system consists of speciallydesigned hinges and brackets on the front seatbackrests designed to help absorb some of theenergy generated in a collision from the rear(when the vehicle is rear-ended).

In the event of a collision of this type, the hingesand brackets of the front seat backrests aredesigned to change position slightly to allowthe backrest/head restraint to help support theoccupant's head before moving slightly rear-ward. This movement helps absorb some ofthe forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

• The WHIPS system is designed to sup-plement the other safety systems inyour vehicle. For this system to functionproperly, the three-point seat belt mustbe worn. Please be aware that no sys-tem can prevent all possible injuries thatmay occur in an accident.

• The WHIPS system is designed to func-tion in certain collisions from the rear,depending on the crash severity, angleand speed.

WARNING

• Occupants in the front seats must neversit out of position. The occupant's backmust be as upright as comfort allowsand be against the seat back with theseat belt properly fastened.

• If your vehicle has been involved in arear-end collision, the front seat backr-ests must be inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician, evenif the seats appear to be undamaged.Certain components in the WHIPS sys-tem may need to be replaced.

• Do not attempt to service any compo-nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

G02

1842

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

32

WARNING

• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behindthe front seats could impede the func-tion of the WHIPS system.

• If the rear seat backrests are foldeddown, cargo must be secured to pre-vent it from sliding forward against thefront seat backrests in the event of acollision from the rear. This could inter-fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-tem.

G01

8567

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat backr-ests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facingchild seat could impede the function of theWHIPS system. If the rear seat is foldeddown, the occupied front seats must beadjusted forward so that they do not touchthe folded rear seat.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

33

G02

2831

Driving after a collision

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,the text SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL mayappear in the information display. This indi-cates that the vehicle's functionality has beenreduced.

NOTE

This text can only be shown if the display isundamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys-tem is intact.

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if oneor more of the safety systems (e.g. front or sideairbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more ofthe seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. Thecollision may have damaged an important

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,sensors for one of the safety systems, thebrake system, etc.

WARNING

• Never attempt to repair the vehicleyourself or to reset the electrical systemafter the vehicle has displayed SAFETY

MODE SEE MANUAL. This couldresult in injury or improper system func-tion.

• Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-ing status should only be done by atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

• After SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL

has been displayed, if you detect theodor of fuel vapor, or see any signs offuel leakage, do not attempt to start thevehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

Attempting to start the vehicle

If damage to the vehicle is minor and there isno fuel leakage, you may attempt to start thevehicle. To do so:

1. Remove the remote control from the igni-tion slot.

2. Reinsert the remote in the ignition slot. Thevehicle will then attempt to reset Safetymode to normal status.

3. Try to start the vehicle.

Moving the vehicle

If the electrical system is able to reset systemstatus to normal (SAFETY MODE SEE

MANUAL will no longer be shown in the dis-play), the vehicle may be moved carefully fromits present position, if for example, it is blockingtraffic. It should, however, not be moved fartherthan is absolutely necessary.

WARNING

Even if the vehicle appears to be drivableafter Safety mode has been set, it shouldnot be driven or towed (pulled by anothervehicle). There may be concealed damagethat could make it difficult or impossible tocontrol. The vehicle should be transportedon a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraintsystems for all occupants including children.Remember that, regardless of age and size, achild should always be properly restrained in avehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH attachments, which make it more con-venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children aredesigned to be secured in the vehicle by lapbelts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.Such child restraint systems can help protectchildren in vehicles in the event of an accidentonly if they are used properly. However, chil-dren could be endangered in a crash if the childrestraints are not properly secured in the vehi-cle. Failure to follow the installation instructionsfor your child restraint can result in your childstriking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitablesubstitute for a child restraint system. In anaccident, a child held in a person's arms canbe crushed between the vehicle's interior andan unrestrained person. The child could also beinjured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuveror impact. The same can also happen if theinfant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuringor increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-erning how and where children should be car-ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-ing in your state or province. Recent accidentstatistics have shown that children are safer inrear seating positions than front seating posi-tions when properly restrained. A child restraintsystem can help protect a child in a vehicle.Here's what to look for when selecting a childrestraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meetsapplicable Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system isapproved for the child's height, weight anddevelopment – the label required by the stand-ard or regulation, or instructions for infantrestraints, typically provide this information.

In using any child restraint system, we urge youto carefully look over the instructions that areprovided with the restraint. Be sure you under-stand them and can use the device properlyand safely in this vehicle. A misused childrestraint system can result in increased injuriesfor both the infant or child and other occupantsin the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safetyseat, you should use the rear seat with thestandard seat belt fastened. The best way tohelp protect the child here is to place the childon a cushion so that the seat belt is properlylocated on the hips (see the illustration on page42). Legislation in your state or province maymandate the use of a child seat or cushion incombination with the seat belt, depending onthe child's age and/or size. Please check localregulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)in height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)in height

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened.

• Keep vehicle doors and trunk lockedand keep remote controls out of achild’s reach. Unsupervised childrencould lock themselves in an open trunkand risk injury. Children should betaught not to play in vehicles.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure to these high temperaturesfor even a short period of time cancause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keep theseat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seataccording to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into thebuckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut aroundthe child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will beaudible at this time and is normal. The belt willnow be locked in place. This function is auto-matically disabled when the seat belt isunlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sitin the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simplereally. A front airbag is a very powerful devicedesigned, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speedof inflation, a child should never be placed inthe front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvohas been an innovator in safety for over sev-enty-five years, and we'll continue to do ourpart. But we need your help. Please rememberto put your children in the back seat, andbuckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

• Always wear your seat belt.

• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safetydevice which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce seriousinjuries during certain types of accidents.Volvo recommends that you do not dis-connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that everyonein the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the backseat of any vehicle with a front passengerside airbag.

Drive safely!

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

36

Child restraints

G02

2840

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraintsystems: infant seats, convertible seats, andbooster cushions. They are classified accord-ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using athree-point seat belt. Refer to page 43–44for information on securing a child restraintusing ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tetheranchorages.

G02

2847

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

G02

3269

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-turer's instructions for detailed informationon securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

37

WARNING

• When not in use, keep the child restraintsystem secured or remove it from thepassenger compartment to help pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or collision.

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

38

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G02

2844

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-er's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 43–44 for information onsecuring a child restraint using ISOFIX loweranchors and/or top tether anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of thevehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

G02

3270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facingposition only.

• The infant seat should not be positionedbehind the driver's seat unless there isadequate space for safe installation.

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

G02

3271

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

39

G02

2846

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let theseat belt retract and pull it taut. A soundfrom the seat belt retractor's automaticlocking function will be audible at this timeand is normal. The seat belt should now belocked in place.

G02

2850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure thatit is held securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

The infant seat can be removed by unbucklingthe seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

40

Securing a convertible seat with a seatbelt

G01

8630

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to pages 43 and 44 for informationon securing a child restraint using ISOFIXlower anchors and/or top tether ancho-rages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-ward or rearward-facing position, dependingon the age and size of the child.

G02

2847

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-ble for the child's age and size. See the con-vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seatof the vehicle.

WARNING

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

• Convertible child seats should be instal-led in the rear seat only.

• A rear-facing convertible seat should notbe positioned behind the driver's seatunless there is adequate space for safeinstallation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

41

G02

2848

Fasten the seat belt


4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible at this

time and is normal. The seat belt shouldnow be locked in place.

G02

2849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat toensure that it is held securely in place bythe seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

The convertible seat can be removed byunbuckling the seat belt and letting it retractcompletely.

G02

2850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severityof an accident were to cause the airbag toinflate, this could lead to serious injury ordeath to a child seated in this position.

01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

42

Securing a booster cushion

G02

2851

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on thebooster cushion, attach the seat belt to oraround the cushion according to the man-ufacturer's instructions.


G02

2852

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut andfits snugly around the child.

WARNING

• The hip section of the three-point seatbelt must fit snugly across the child'ships, not across the stomach.

• The shoulder section of the three-pointseat belt should be positioned acrossthe chest and shoulder.

• The shoulder belt must never be placedbehind the child's back or under thearm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

43

Using the ISOFIX lower child seatanchors

G02

1064

ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped childseats are located in the rear, outboard seats,hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbolson the seat back upholstery mark the anchorpositions as shown. To access the anchors,kneel on the seat cushion and locate theanchors by feel. Always follow your child seatmanufacturer's installation instructions, anduse both ISOFIX lower anchors and top tetherswhenever possible.

To access the anchors

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press downthe seat cushion and locate the anchors byfeel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the childrestraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX loweranchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat strapsaccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

NOTE

• The rear seat's center position is notequipped with ISOFIX lower anchors.When installing a child restraint in thisposition, attach the restraint's top tetherstrap (if it is so equipped) to the toptether anchorage point and secure therestraint with the vehicle's center seatbelt.

• Always follow your child seat manufac-turer's installation instructions, and useboth ISOFIX lower anchors and toptethers whenever possible.

G01

8631

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIXlower anchors

WARNING

• Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).If the attachment is not correctly fas-tened, the child restraint may not beproperly secured in the event of a colli-sion.

• The ISOFIX lower child restraintanchors are only intended for use withchild seats positioned in the outboardseating positions. These anchors arenot certified for use with any childrestraint that is positioned in the centerseating position. When securing a childrestraint in the center seating position,use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors 01

44

Child restraint anchorages

G02

1068

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint toptether anchorages in the rear seat. They arelocated on the rear parcel shelf.

Securing a child seat

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchor-age to be used.

3. Route the top tether strap under the headrestraint and attach it to the anchor.

4. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO-FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint isnot equipped with lower tether straps, orthe restraint is used in the center seatingposition, follow instructions for securing a

child restraint using the Automatic LockingRetractor seat belt (see page 35).

5. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions for information on securing thechild seat.

WARNING

• Never route a top tether strap over thetop of the head restraint. The strapshould be routed beneath the headrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposedby correctly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses. Theanchorages are not able to withstandexcessive forces on them in the event ofcollision if full harness seat belts or adultseat belts are installed to them. An adultwho uses a belt anchored in a childrestraint anchorage runs a great risk ofsuffering severe injuries should a colli-sion occur.

• Do not install rear speakers that requirethe removal of the top tether anchors orinterfere with the proper use of the toptether strap.

01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

45

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safetyreasons. You must register your child restraintto be reached in a recall. To stay informedabout child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill outand return the registration card that comeswith new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recallinformation in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.In Canada, visit Transport Canada's ChildSafety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Integrated booster cushion*1

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushion islocated in the center seating position. Thisbooster cushion has been specially designedto help safeguard a child in the rear seat. Itshould be stowed (folded up into the rear seatbackrest) when not in use. When using an inte-grated booster cushion, the child must besecured with the vehicle's three-point seatbelt.

Use this booster cushion only withchildren who weigh between 33 and80 lbs (15 and 36 kg) and whoseheight is between 38 and 54 in (97and 137 cm). In Canada, Transport

Canada's weight recommendation is40-80 lbs (18-36 kg).The booster cushion is designed to raise thechild higher, so that the shoulder strap crossesover the child's collarbone, not over the child'sneck. If using a booster cushion does not resultin proper positioning of the shoulder strap,then the child should be placed in a properlysecured child restraint (see page 36). Theshoulder belt must never be placed behind thechild's back or under the arm.

Using the integrated booster cushion

G02

1070

G02

1071

G02

1072

Fold down the booster cushion from therear seat backrest.

Loosen the Velcro strip.

Fold up the backrest section of the boostercushion into the upright position.

Before driving, check that:

1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

47

• The seat belt is properly positioned and istaut.

• The shoulder section of the seat belt isacross the child's collarbone, not over theneck.

• The lap section of the seat belt is acrossthe child's hips and not the abdomen.

Stowing the integrated booster cushion

G02

1074

G02

1075

G02

1076

Fold down the backrest section of thebooster cushion.

Fasten the Velcro strip.

Fold up the booster cushion into the rearseat backrest.

NOTE

See also the instructions on the integratedbooster cushion.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY canoccurFollow all instructions on thebooster cushion and in the vehi-cle's owner's manual.MAKE SURE THE BOOSTERCUSHION IS SECURELYLOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD ISSEATED.• Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs(15 and 36 kg) and whose height isbetween 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm).In Canada, Transport Canada's weightrecommendation is 40-80 lbs (18-36kg).

• In the event of a collision while the inte-grated booster cushion was occupied,the entire booster cushion and seat beltmust be replaced. The booster cushionshould also be replaced if it is badlyworn or damaged in any way. This workshould be performed by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician only.

01 Safety

Child safety locks 01


Child safety locks

G02

1077

Manual child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear doorjambs. Use the remote control's key blade or ascrewdriver to adjust these controls.

The rear doors can only be opened fromthe outside when the slot is in the horizon-tal position.

The rear doors can be opened from theinside when the slot is in the vertical posi-tion.

G01

9300

Power child safety locks*

The power child lock function can be activatedby pressing the button shown in the inset illus-tration above. The ignition must be in mode Ior II (see page 80).

When the function is activated, a message willappear in the information display and the indi-cator light in the button will light up.

With the function activated:

• The rear door windows can only be openedwith the control in the driver's door.

• The rear doors cannot be opened from theinside.

NOTE

There are no manual child safety locks onvehicles equipped with the optional powerchild safety locks.

WARNING

Remember, in the event of an accident, therear seat passengers cannot open the doorsfrom the inside with the controls in positionA (manual child safety locks) or if the powerchild safety lock function is activated.

01 Safety

01

49

50

Remote key and key blade..................................................................... 52Valet locking ........................................................................................... 59Keyless drive........................................................................................... 60Locks....................................................................................................... 63Alarm....................................................................................................... 66

02LOCKS AND ALARM

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

02

52

Introduction

Two remote keys or optional Personal CarCommunicators (PCC) are provided with yourvehicle. They enable you to unlock the doorsand trunk, and also function as ignition keys tostart the vehicle or operate electrical compo-nents. The remote keys contain detachablemetal key blades for manually locking orunlocking the driver's door and the glove com-partment. Up to six remotes can be pro-grammed for use on the same vehicle.

The PCCs have enhanced functionality com-pared with the standard remote key.

NOTE

In the remainder of this chapter, all referen-ces to the remote key also pertain to thePCC unless otherwise stated.

WARNING

Never leave the remote key in the ignition ifchildren are to remain in the vehicle.

Detachable key blade

Each remote key or PCC contains a detachablemetal key blade for mechanically locking orunlocking the driver's door and the glove com-partment, and to enable the valet locking func-tion. See page 57 for more information on thekey blade and page see page 59 for informa-

tion on the valet locking function. The keyblades have a unique code, which is used ifnew ones need to be produced. This code isavailable at an authorized Volvo retailer.

Loss of a remote key

If a remote key is lost, the other one must betaken with the vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician. As an anti-theftmeasure, the code of the lost remote must beerased from the system.

The number of registered keys for the vehiclecan be found in the vehicle's menu under Car

settings Car key memory Number of

keys. See page 122 for a description of themenu system.

USA-5WK49264

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO5WK49236

FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO5WK49233

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Canada-5WK49264

IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO5WK49236

IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266

IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO5WK49233

IC:267T-5WK49233

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Key memory – door mirrors and driver's

seat

The position of the side door mirrors andoptional power driver's seat are stored in theremote keys when the vehicle is locked. Thenext time the driver's door is unlocked with thesame remote key and the door is opened within2 minutes, the power driver's seat and sidedoor mirrors will automatically move to theposition that they were in when the doors weremost recently locked with the same remotekey. See page 83 for more information.

02 Locks and alarm


02

��

53

This feature can be activated or deactivated inthe vehicle's menu under Car settings Car

key memory Seat & mirror positions. Seepage 122 for a description of the menu sys-tem.

See also page 60 for information regardingvehicles with the optional keyless drive.

Confirmation when locking/unlocking

the vehicle

When the vehicle is locked with a remote key,the turn signals will flash once to confirm thatthis has been completed correctly.

When the vehicle is locked, confirmation willonly be given if all of the locks are locked afterthe doors have been closed.

NOTE

If you do not receive confirmation whenlocking the vehicle, check whether a door orthe trunk is ajar, or if this feature has beenturned off in the menu.

This function can be activated or deactivatedunder Car settings Light settings Lock

confirmation, light, or Car settings Light

settings Unlock confirmation, light. Seepage 122 for a description of the menu sys-tem.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your vehiclecontains a coded transponder. The code in thekey is transmitted to an antenna in the ignitionslot where it is compared to the code stored inthe start inhibitor module. The vehicle will startonly with a properly coded key. If you misplacea key, take the other keys to a trained andqualified Volvo service technician for reprog-ramming as an antitheft measure. The follow-ing messages (which may appear in the instru-ment panel display) are related to the immobil-izer:

Message Meaning

Key error Reinsert

key

Remote key not rec-ognized during start.Try to start the vehi-cle again.

Car key Not found PCC with keylessdrive only. Remotekey not recognizedduring start. Try tostart the vehicleagain.

Immobilizer See

manual

Remote key faultduring start. Contactan authorized Volvoworkshop.

CAUTION

Never use force when inserting the remotekey in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannotbe started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-dition: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

02 Locks and alarm


02


Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

See page 107 for information on starting thevehicle.

Replacing the battery in the remote key

The batteries should be replaced if:

• The information symbol illuminates andReplace car key battery is shown in thedisplay and/or

• if the locks do not react after severalattempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE

The remote key's range is normally approx-imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

See page 57 for information on replacing thebattery.

Common functions – Remote key/Personal Car Communicator (PCC)

G02

1078

Remote key

G02

1079

Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Trunk unlock/open

Panic alarm

Information

Buttons on the remote

Lock – Press the Lock button on the remoteonce to lock all doors and the trunk. The turnsignals will flash once to confirm locking.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on theremote once to unlock the driver's door.

After a short pause, press the Unlock button asecond time within 10 seconds to unlock theother doors and the trunk.

This function can be changed so that all doorsunlock at the same time under Car settings

lock settings Doors, unlock. See page122 for a description of the menu system.

Approach lighting – As you approach thevehicle, press the button on the remote key tolight the interior lighting, parking lights, licenseplate lighting and the lights in the door mir-rors*.

These lights will switch off automatically after30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 122 for moreinformation.

Unlock/open trunk

02 Locks and alarm


02

��

55

Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but doesnot open it) and disarms the alarm and optionalmovement sensor (the alarm indicator light onthe dashboard will go out). If the trunk is notopened within two minutes it will automaticallyrelock and the alarm will be rearmed.

Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk andpops it open slightly.

NOTE

Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunklid may prevent it from opening.

See also page 64 for information on openingthe trunk from the passenger compartment.

After closing, the trunk will not automaticallyrelock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm thealarm.

Panic alarm – This button can be used toattract attention during emergency situations.

To activate the panic alarm, press and hold thisbutton for at least 3 seconds or press it twicewithin 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn willbe activated. The panic alarm will stop auto-matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

To deactivate, wait approximately 5 secondsand press the button again.

These lights will switch off automatically after30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 122 for moreinformation.

The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi-cle.

Range

The remote key has a range of approximately60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

NOTE

Buildings or other obstacles may interferewith the function of the remote key. Thevehicle can also be locked or unlocked withthe key blade, see page 57.

Functions – PCC

G02

1080

Information button

Indicator lights

Pressing the information button provides cer-tain information about the vehicle with the helpof the indicator lights.

Using the information button

1. Press the information button .

2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen-tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi-cate that the PCC is receiving informationfrom the vehicle. If any of the buttons arepressed during this 7-second period,transmission of information to the PCC willbe interrupted.

02 Locks and alarm


02

56

NOTE

If none of the indicator lights flash when theinformation button has been pressed sev-eral times from different places in relation tothe vehicle, contact an authorized Volvoservice technician.

The indicator lights provide informationaccording to the illustration:

G03

0262

Steady green light: the vehicle is correctlylocked.

Steady yellow light: the vehicle is notlocked.

Alternatively flashing red lights (Heartbeatsensor): if the two heartbeat sensor lightsflash, this indicates that someone may be

inside the vehicle. These lights are onlyactivated if the alarm has been triggered.

Steady red light: the alarm has been trig-gered.

Range

The PCC's lock and unlock functions have arange of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from thevehicle.

NOTE

• The approach lighting, panic alarm, andthe functions controlled by the informa-tion button have a range of approxi-mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle.

• Buildings or other obstacles may inter-fere with the function of the PCC.

Outside of the PCC´s range

If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft(100 m) from the vehicle when the informationbutton is pressed, no new information will bereceived. The PCC most recently used to lockor unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle'smost recently received status. The indicatorlights will not flash when the information buttonis pressed while the PCC is out of range.

If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlockthe vehicle, only the one used most recently willshow the correct locking status.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lights illuminate whenthe information button is pressed, this maybe because the most recent transmissionbetween the vehicle and the PCC was inter-rupted or impeded by buildings or otherobjects.

Heartbeat Sensor

The heartbeat sensor function is a comple-ment to the vehicle's standard alarm, and indi-cates at a distance of up to 300 ft (100 m) thatsomeone may be in the vehicle. The heartbeatsensor only functions if the alarm has beentriggered.

NOTE

The heartbeat sensor registers a person'sheartbeat in the form of vibrations in thevehicle's chassis. For this reason, the sen-sor's function may be impaired in areas withhigh levels of noise or vibrations.

Keyless drive

Vehicles equipped with the optional PersonalCar Communicator have the keyless drive

02 Locks and alarm


02

��

57

function, see page 60 for detailed informa-tion.

Detachable key blade

The key blade can be removed from the remotekey. When removed, the key blade can be usedas follows:

• To lock/unlock the driver's door

• To lock/unlock the glove compartment(see page 63)

• To enable/disable the valet locking func-tion (see page 59)

Unlocking the doors with the detached

key blade

Insert the key blade as far as possible in thedriver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlockthe driver's door only.

NOTE

After unlocking the driver's door with thekey blade, opening the door will trigger thealarm.

To disable the alarm:

Insert the remote key in the ignition slot.

Locking the doors with the detached key

blade

1. Lock the rear doors and the front passeng-er's door by pressing the lock button oneach door.

2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun-ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door.

Removing the key blade

G02

1082

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the remotekey.

Reinserting the key blade in the remote

key

1. Hold the remote key with the slot for thekey blade up.

2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

3. Gently press the key blade in the grooveuntil it clicks into place.

Replacing batteries in the remote key/PCC

The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCCshould be replaced if:

• The information symbol lights up and a textis shown in the information display.

and/or

• the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not reactwhen a button on the remote key/PCC ispressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m)from the vehicle.

02 Locks and alarm


02

58

Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in theremote key, two batteries in the PCC)

Opening the remote key/PCC

Slide the spring loaded catch to theside.

Pull the key blade straight out of theremote key.

Insert a small screwdriver in the holebehind the spring loaded catch and care-fully pry up the cover.

NOTE

Turn the remote key with the buttonsupward so that the batteries do not fall outwhen the cover is removed.

Replacing the batteries

CAUTION

When handling batteries, avoid touchingtheir contact surfaces as this could result inpoor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)sides.

Remote key (one battery)

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-tery.

2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-ward.

PCC (two batteries)

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-teries.

2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) sideupward.

3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.Insert the second new battery on top of theplastic spacer, with the + side downward.

Re-assembling the remote key

1. Press the remote key's cover into place.

2. Hold the remote key with the slot for thekey blade up.

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

4. Gently press the key blade in the grooveuntil it clicks into place.

Old batteries should be properly recycled.

02 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

02

59

Blocking access to the trunk

G02

1083

Normal locking/unlocking function

G02

1084

Locking/unlocking points with valet locking acti-vated

By utilizing the remote key with the key bladeremoved, the valet locking feature enables you

to block access to the trunk and glove com-partment for e.g., valet parking or when thevehicle is brought to the retailer for service.

With the valet locking function activated:

• The vehicle's doors can be locked orunlocked with the remote

• The engine can be started

• The glove compartment cannot beunlocked

• Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lidcannot be unlocked or opened with theremote, and the rear seat backrests cannotbe lowered

Activating the valet locking function

G02

0508

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-ment lock.

Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock. Amessage will appear in the instrumentpanel display.

Deactivating the valet locking function

Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock-wise in the glove compartment lock to deacti-vate valet locking.

See page 63 for information on locking theglove compartment normally, without activat-ing the valet locking function.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

02

60

Keyless drive (models with PersonalCar Communicator only)

Keyless locking and unlocking

G02

0577

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft(1.5 meters)

This system makes it possible to unlock andlock the vehicle without having to press anybuttons on the Personal Car Communicators(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keylessdrive remote key in your possession to operatethe central locking system.

NOTE

The buttons on the keyless drive remote keycan also be used to lock and unlock thevehicle, see page 54 for more information.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehiclehave the keyless function, and additional onescan be ordered. The system can accommo-date up to six PCCs.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the areaaround the vehicle covered by the keyless driveantennas.

Unlocking the vehicle

• A keyless drive remote key must be on thesame side of the vehicle as the door to beopened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)of the lock or the trunk (see the shadedareas in the illustration).

• Pull a door handle to unlock and open thedoor or press the trunk opening control onthe trunk lid.

The number of doors that are unlocked at thesame time can be set in the vehicle's menusystem, under Car settings Lock settings

Keyless entry. See page 122 for a descrip-tion of the menu system.

NOTE

If the PCC does not function normally (weakbattery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlockedwith the detachable key blade, seepage 57.

Locking the vehicle

The doors and the trunk can be locked bypressing the lock button in any of the outsidedoor handles.

NOTE

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selectormust be in the Park (P) position, all doorsand the trunk must be closed and the igni-tion must be switched off before the vehiclecan be locked.

Keyless drive remote key and driver's

seat/door mirror memory

• When you leave the vehicle with a PCC inyour possession and lock any door, theposition of the driver's seat will be storedin the seat's memory.

• The next time a door is opened by a personwith the same PCC in his/her possession,the driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-matically move to the position that theywere in when the door was most recentlylocked.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

02

��

61

NOTE

If several people carrying PCCs approachthe vehicle at the same time, the driver'sseat and door mirrors will assume the posi-tions they were in for the person who opensthe driver's door.

See also page 83 for information on adjustingand storing the seat's position in the seat mem-ory.

Keyless drive information messages

If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehiclewhile the engine is running or if the ignition isin mode II and all of the doors are closed, amessage will appear in the instrument paneldisplay and an audible signal will sound.

When at least one PCC has been returned tothe car, the message will be erased in the dis-play and the audible signal will stop when:

• A door has been opened and closed

• The PCC has been inserted in the ignitionslot

• The READ button (see page 124 for thelocation of this button) has been pressed.

CAUTION

• Keyless drive remote keys should neverbe left in the vehicle. In the event of abreak-in, a remote found in the vehiclecould make it possible to start theengine.

• Electromagnetic fields or metalobstructions can interfere with the key-less drive system. Avoid placing theremote key near cellular phones, metal-lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

Location of the keyless drive antennas

G02

0479

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

02

62

The keyless drive system has a number ofantennas located at various points in the vehi-cle.

On the inside center of the rear bumper

Left rear door handle

Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside

Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat

Right rear door handle

Under the rear section of the center con-sole

Under the front section of the center con-sole.

WARNING

People with implanted pacemakers shouldnot allow the pacemaker to come closerthan 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keylessdrive system's antennas. This is to help pre-vent interference between the pacemakerand the keyless drive system.

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

02

��

63

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

From outside the vehicle

The remote key locks all of the doors and thetrunk.

The first press on the unlock button unlocks thedriver's door and a second press unlocks theother doors and the trunk (see also page 54).

NOTE

The vehicle cannot be locked if a door isopen.

From inside the vehicle

The lock buttons on the door panel can be usedto lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at thesame time.

Unlocking

� Press the unlock button.

Locking

� Press the lock button after the front doorshave been closed.

• Each door can be locked individually withthe lock button on the respective doors.The door must be closed first.

• The door can be unlocked by pulling thedoor handle once and opened by pullingthe handle again.

Automatic relocking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm willrearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunkhas been opened.

Automatic locking

When the vehicle starts to move, the doors andtrunk can be locked automatically. This featurecan be turned on or off under Car settings

Lock settings Doors automatic lock.See page 122 for a description of the menusystem.

Glove compartment

G02

0548

The glove compartment can only be lockedand unlocked using the detachable key bladein the remote key. See page 57 for informationon removing the key blade from the remotekey.

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

02

64

Locking/unlocking the trunk

Trunk unlock button on the remote key

Unlocking the trunk with the remote key

� Press the trunk unlock button on theremote.

Press once: This unlocks but does not openthe trunk. The trunk can then be opened bypressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. Ifthe trunk is not opened within two minutes itwill automatically relock and the alarm will berearmed.

Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk andpops it open slightly.

NOTE

Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunklid may prevent it from opening.

The alarm indicator light on the dashboard willgo out to indicate that the alarm is not moni-toring the entire vehicle. The accessory move-ment and inclination sensors will be automati-cally disconnected.

When the trunk is closed again, it will relock,and all alarm functions will be reactivated.

Locking the trunk with the remote key

� Press the lock button on the remote, seepage 54

NOTE

• If the doors are locked while the trunk isopen, the trunk will remain unlockeduntil the vehicle is relocked by pressingthe Lock button on the remote key.

• On keyless drive vehicles, the gearselector must be in the Park (P) position,all doors and the trunk must be closedand the ignition must be switched offbefore the vehicle can be locked.

Opening the trunk from the passenger

compartment

G02

2853

� Press the button on the lighting panel to unlock and pop open the trunk

NOTE

The taillights will illuminate automatically fora short period when the trunk has beenopened.

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

02

65

Unlocking the trunk with the key blade

If the remote key is not functioning properly,the trunk can be unlocked with the detachablekey blade. See page 57 for information onremoving the key blade from the remote key.

Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole.

Unlock the trunk by inserting the key bladein the keyhole and turning a half turn coun-terclockwise as shown in the illustration.

Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S.

models only)

G02

2920

Opening the trunk from the inside

The S80 is equipped with a florescent handleon the inside of the trunk lid, which can be usedin an emergency situation to open the trunkfrom the inside. Pull the handle down to releasethe trunk lid. After use, the handle must bepushed back into its original position before thetrunk can be closed.

This handle is not intended to be used toanchor the trunk lid when long loads are beingtransported.

WARNING

• Keep vehicle doors and trunk lockedand keep keys out of a child’s reach.Unsupervised children could lock them-selves in an open trunk and risk injury.Children should be taught not to play invehicles.

• On hot days, the temperature in thetrunk or vehicle interior can rise veryquickly. Exposure of people to thesehigh temperatures for even a shortperiod of time can cause heat-relatedinjury or death. Small children are par-ticularly at risk.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

02

66

The alarm system

The alarm is automatically armed whenever thevehicle is locked with the remote key oroptional Personal Car Communicator.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitorsa number of points on the vehicle. The follow-ing conditions will trigger the alarm:

• The hood is forced open.

• The trunk is forced open

• A door is forced open.

• The ignition slot is tampered with.

• An attempt is made to start the vehicle witha non-approved key (a key not coded tothe car's ignition).

• If there is movement in the passenger com-partment (if the vehicle is equipped withthe accessory movement sensor).

• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicleis equipped with the accessory inclinationsensor).

• The battery is disconnected (while thealarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarmis disarmed.

A message will appear in the information dis-play if a fault should occur in the alarm system.Contact an authorized Volvo service techni-cian.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-nents in the alarm system yourself. Thiscould affect the insurance policy on thevehicle.

The alarm indicator light

The status of the alarm system is indicated bythe indicator light on the dashboard (see illus-tration):

• Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed

• The indicator light flashes at one-secondintervals – the alarm is armed

• The indicator light flashes rapidly beforethe remote key is inserted in the ignitionslot – the alarm has been triggered.

Arming the alarm

� Press the Lock button on the remote key.One long flash of the turn signals will con-firm that the alarm is armed.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changedunder Car settings Lock settings

Keyless entry. See page 122 for a descriptionof the menu system.

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operationis subject to the following conditions: (1) thisdevice may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

02

��

67

Disarming the alarm

� Press the Unlock button on the remote key.> Two short flashes from the car's direc-

tion indicators confirm that the alarmhas been deactivated and that all doorsare unlocked.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped bypressing the Unlock button on the remote keyor by inserting the remote key in the ignitionslot. Two short flashes from the car's directionindicators confirm that the alarm has beenturned off.

Other alarm-related functions

Automatic re-arming

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm willre-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or thetrunk has been opened.

Audible/visual alarm signal

• An audible alarm signal is given by a bat-tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lastsfor 30 seconds.

• The visual alarm signal is given by flashingall turn signals for approximately 5 minutesor until the alarm is turned off.

Remote key not functioning

If the remote key is not functioning properly,the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle canbe started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.> This will trigger the alarm.

2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot.This will turn off the alarm.

Reduced alarm function

Turning off the accessory alarm sensors

Navigation (left/rght/up/down) buttons

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

In certain situations it may be desirable to turnoff the accessory inclination and movementalarm sensors if, for example, you drive yourvehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of theboat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left inthe vehicle with the doors locked.

The vehicle's menu system is used for turningoff these sensors (see page 122 for a descrip-tion of the menu system).

1. Go into the menu under Car settings.

2. Select Reduced guard (Press Enter tochoose).

3. Two alternatives are now available:

• Activate once. If this alternative isselected, Reduced guard–see

manual will appear in the instrumentpanel display and the accessory incli-nation and movement alarm sensors willbe deactivated when the vehicle islocked.

• Ask on exit. If this alternative isselected, the message Press ENTER

to reduce guard until engine is

started—Press EXIT to cancel willappear in the center console displayeach time the engine is turned off andthe accessory inclination and move-ment alarm sensors will be deactivatedwhen the vehicle is locked.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

02

68

4. Press ENTER and lock the vehicle.

The next time the engine is started, the alarmsystem will be reset and Full guard will appearin the instrument panel display. The accessoryinclination and movement alarm sensors will bereactivated.

In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not todeactivate the accessory inclination and move-ment alarm sensors, do not make a choice inthe menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

02 Locks and alarm

02

69

G020912


Instruments and controls........................................................................ 72Ignition modes........................................................................................ 80Seats....................................................................................................... 82Seats S80 Executive ............................................................................. 87Steering wheel........................................................................................ 89Lighting................................................................................................... 90Wipers and washers................................................................................ 96Power windows....................................................................................... 98Mirrors................................................................................................... 100Power moonroof................................................................................... 102HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................. 104Starting the engine................................................................................ 107Transmission......................................................................................... 111Brakes................................................................................................... 114Parking brake........................................................................................ 116

03YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT


Instruments and controls

03

72

Instrument overview



03

��


Function Page

Menus and mes-sages, turn signals,high/low beams,trip computer

122, 93,90, 153

Cruise control 159

Horn, airbag 89, 20

Main instrumentpanel

73

Menu system, audiocontrols

133

Ignition slot 80

START/STOPENGINE button

80

Hazard warningflashers

93

Door handle –

In-door control pan-els (power win-dows, mirrors,power child safetylocks, central lock-ing button)

98, 100,48, 63

Function Page

Menu controls,audio and climatecontrol systems

122, 134,128

Center console but-tons

122

Gear selector 111

Controls for activechassis (Four-C)

Controls for activechassis (Four-C) -certain models only

158

Wipers and washers 96, 97

Steering wheeladjustment

89

Parking brake 116

Hood opening con-trol

217

Function Page

Power seat* adjust-ment controls

82

Lighting panel, but-tons for openingfuel filler door andunlocking andopening the trunk

90, 202,64

Information displays

G01

0604

Information displays in the instrument panel

The information displays (1) show informationon some of the vehicle's functions, such ascruise control, the trip computer and mes-sages. The information is shown with text andsymbols.



03


More detailed information can be found in thedescriptions of the functions that use the infor-mation displays.

Gauges

G01

0605

Gauges in the instrument panel

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel levelindicator in the gauge moves from right toleft as the amount of fuel in the tankdecreases. See also the section on refuel-ing beginning on page 200. See page153 for more information on fuel level andconsumption.

The tachometer shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).Do not drive continuously with the needlein the red area of the gauge. The engine

management system will automaticallyprevent excessively high engines speeds.This will be noticeable as a pronouncedunevenness in engine speed.

Indicator, information, and warningsymbols

G01

0604

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and information symbols


High beam and turn signal indicators

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up inignition mode II or when the engine is started.When the engine has started, all the symbolsshould go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-engaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functioncheck is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym-bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbolfor faults in the vehicle's emissions system andthe symbol for low oil pressure.

Certain symbols may not have their functionsillustrated, depending on the vehicle's equip-ment.

Indicator and information symbols

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active BendingLight (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog light on

Stability system

Tire pressure monitoring sen-sor (TPMS)

Low fuel level



03

��


Symbol Description

Information symbol, see textin information display

High beam indicator

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

Fault in the Active Bending Light

(ABL) system

This symbol will illuminate if the there is a faultin the ABL system.

Malfunction Indicator Light

As you drive, a computer called On-BoardDiagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle'sengine, transmission, electrical and emissionsystems.

The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE)light will illuminate if the computer senses acondition that potentially may need correcting.When this happens, please have your vehiclechecked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician as soon as possible.

A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) lightmay have many causes. Sometimes, you may

not notice a change in your car's behavior.Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurtfuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil-ity. Extended driving without correcting thecause could even damage other componentsin your vehicle.

This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap isnot closed tightly or if the engine was runningwhile the vehicle was refueled.

Canadian models are equipped with thissymbol.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

warning light

If the warning light comes on, there may be amalfunction in the ABS system (the standardbraking system will still function). Check thesystem by:

1. Stopping in a safe place and switching offthe ignition.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning light goes off, no furtheraction is required.

If the warning light remains on, the vehicleshould be driven to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for inspection, seepage 114 for additional information.


Rear fog light

This symbol indicates that the rear fog light(located in the driver's side tail light cluster) ison.

Stability system

This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,see page 156 for more detailed information.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)*

This symbol illuminates to indicate that tirepressure in one or more tires is low, seepage 263 for detailed information.

Low fuel level

When this light comes on, the vehicle shouldbe refueled as soon as possible.

Information symbol

The information symbol illuminates and a textmessage is displayed if a fault is detected inone of the vehicle's systems. The message canbe erased and the symbol can be turned off bypressing the READ button (see page 124 forinformation) or this will take place automaticallyafter a short time (the length of time varies,depending on the function affected).

The information symbol may also illuminatetogether with other symbols.



03

76

High beam indicator

This symbol illuminates when the high beamheadlights are on, or if the high beam flashfunction is used.

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

NOTE

• Both turn signal indicators will flashwhen the hazard warning flashers areused.

• If either of these indicators flash fasterthan normal, the direction indicators arenot functioning properly.


Symbol Description

Low oil pressure

Parking brake applied

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Symbol Description

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol

Low oil pressure

If the light comes on while driving, stop thevehicle, stop the engine immediately, andcheck the engine oil level. If the oil level is nor-mal and the light stays on after restart, have thevehicle towed to the nearest trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician. This is normal,provided it goes off when the engine speed isincreased.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates when the parkingbrake is applied. On models equipped with theelectric parking brake, this symbol flasheswhile the brake is being applied and then glowssteadily.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has beendetected. See the message in the informationdisplay.


NOTE

This symbol also comes on when themechanical parking brake is only slightlyapplied.

Airbags – SRS

If this light comes on while the vehicle is beingdriven, or remains on for longer than approxi-mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has beenstarted, the SRS system's diagnostic functionshave detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre-tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)inspected by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician as soon as possible.

Seat belt reminder

This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec-onds if the driver has not fastened his or herseat belt.

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a faulthas occurred in the electrical system. Contactan authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil orcoolant levels, towing or hard driving at high



03

��

77

heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.Engine overheating will be signaled with textand a red warning triangle in the middle of theinstrument display. The exact text will dependon the degree of overheating. It may rangefrom "HIGH ENGINE TEMP – SLOW

DOWN" to "HIGH ENGINE TEMP – STOP

ENGINE." If appropriate, other messages,such as "COOLANT LEVEL LOW" will also bedisplayed. If your engine does overheat so thatyou must stop the engine, always allow theengine to cool before attempting to check oiland coolant levels.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level maybe too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place andcheck the level in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 220. If the level in the reservoir is belowMIN, the vehicle should be transported to anauthorized Volvo workshop to have the brakesystem checked.


If the and symbols come on at thesame time, there may be a fault in the brakeforce distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn offthe engine.


• If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-ing.

• If the symbols remain on, check the level inthe brake fluid reservoir, see page 220. Ifthe brake fluid level is normal but the sym-bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,with great care, to an authorized Volvoworkshop to have the brake systemchecked.

• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, thevehicle should be transported to an author-ized Volvo workshop to have the brakesystem checked.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a warning messageis displayed in the text window: DO

NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed toa trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician and have the brake systeminspected.

• If the ABS and Brake system lights areon at the same time, there is a risk ofreduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol comes on when a faulthas been indicated which could affect thesafety and/or drivability of the vehicle. An

explanatory text is shown on the informationdisplay at the same time. The symbol remainsvisible until the fault has been rectified but thetext message can be cleared with the READ

button, see page 124. The warning symbol canalso come on in conjunction with other sym-bols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi-cle further.

2. Read the information on the informationdisplay. Implement the action in accord-ance with the message in the display. Clearthe message using READ.

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is notclosed properly, the information or warningsymbol comes on together with an explanatorytext message in the instrument panel. Stop thevehicle in a safe place as soon as possible andclose the door, hood or trunk.

If the vehicle is driven at a speedlower than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.

If the vehicle is driven at a speedhigher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.



03

78

Trip odometers

G01

0608

Trip odometers and reset button

Odometer display

Button for toggling between T1 and T2,and for resetting the odometer

The trip odometers are used to measure shortdistances. A short press the button togglesbetween the two trip odometers T1 and T2. Along press (more than 2 seconds) resets anactive trip odometer to zero. The distance isshown in the display.

Clock

G01

0609

Clock and setting control

Display

Control for setting the clock

Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwiseto set the time. The set time is shown in theinformation display.

The clock may be temporarily replaced by asymbol in conjunction with a message, seepage 124.

Analogue clock (S80 Executive only)

G02

9076

Analogue clock

Button for setting the clock back.

Burton for setting the clock ahead.

The analogue clock is located on the dash-board, above the glove compartment.

Use either of the buttons to move the clock'shands back or ahead. This can be done in twoways:

To set the clock 1:

1. Hold down the button.> The hand will move slowly for the first

5 minute time change and then movefaster.

2. Release the button when the time shownon the clock is correct.



03

79

To set the clock 2:

� Press the button quickly.> The hand will move at approximately

10-second intervals.


Ignition modes

03


Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOPENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key

Holding the end of the remote key with thebase of the key blade, insert the remote keyinto the ignition slot, with the buttons facing up,as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot canimpair function or damage the lock.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the igni-tion slot by pressing the key in lightly. It willthen be ejected slightly and can be removed

from the slot. The gear selector must be inposition P (Park).

Ignition modes

The various ignition modes are accessed withthe remote key in the ignition slot.

Posi-tion

Function

0 Odometer, clock and tempera-ture gauge are illuminated. Steer-ing lock is deactivated. The audiosystem can be used.

I Moonroof*, power windows,12-volt sockets, navigation system*,climate system blower, ECC,windshield wipers can be used.

II The headlights come on. Warn-ing/indicator lights come on for5 seconds. All equipment oper-ates apart from heated seats andrear window defroster, whichonly work when the engine is run-ning.

III The starter motor will operateuntil the engine has started.

NOTE

The brake pedal must not be depressedwhen accessing ignition modes I or II.

Ignition mode 0

� Insert the remote key in the ignition slot andpress it lightly. It will be drawn into the slot.

Ignition mode I

� Press the remote key into the ignition slotand press START/STOP ENGINE.

Ignition mode II

� Press the remote key into the ignition slotand press START/STOP ENGINE forapprox. 2 seconds.

Ignition mode III (engine start)

Start the engine, see page 107.

Stopping the engine

� Press START/STOP ENGINE. (If theengine is running and the vehicle is mov-ing, keep the button depressed until theengine stops).

Return to ignition mode 0

� Press START/STOP ENGINE to returnfrom I, II, or III to ignition mode 0.


Ignition modes

03

81

Functions with timer

The audio system can be operated without akey for 15 minutes at a time by pressing thePOWER button. The power windows work forseveral minutes after the key has beenremoved, although not after the door has beenopened.

NOTE

Use the POWER button for the audio sys-tem when the engine is not running to avoiddischarging the battery.


Seats

03

82

Front seats

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmeror softer lumbar support.

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar andmove the seat to the position of yourchoice.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust theangle of the backrest.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. Theseat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• Check that the seat is securely lockedinto position after adjusting.

Folding the front seat backrest

The front passenger seat backrest can befolded to a horizontal position to make room fora long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back as possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches (3 in the inset illustration)on the rear of the backrest.

Without releasing the catches, push thebackrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possibleso that the head restraint slides under theglove compartment.

WARNING

Cover sharp edges on the load to help pre-vent injury to occupants. Secure the load tohelp prevent shifting during sudden stops.


Seats

03

��


Power seat

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/rearward and up/down

Backrest tilt

Operation

The seats can be adjusted for a short periodafter unlocking the door with the remote con-trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seatadjustment is normally made when the ignitionis on and can always be made when the engineis running.

NOTE

• Only one of the power seat's controlscan be used at the same time.

• The power seats have an overload pro-tector that activates if a seat is blockedby any object. If this occurs, switch offthe ignition (key in position 0) and waitfor a short period before operating theseat again.

Seat with memory function*

Stored seat position



Memory button

Programming the memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button (1)can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) can beprogrammed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position and doormirror position in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to thedesired position using the seat and mirroradjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the memory button(4).

3. With the memory button depressed, pressbutton (1) briefly to store the current posi-tion for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the position

that they were in when a button was pro-

grammed:

� Press and hold down button (1) until theseat and mirrors stop moving.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stopautomatically if the button is released beforethe seat has reached the preset position.


Seats

03


Remote keyless entry system and the

driver's seat

The remote control transmitter also controlsthe position of the power driver's seat in thefollowing way:

1. Adjust the seat to your preferences.

2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it usingthe remote control.

The position of the driver's seat is now storedin the remote control's memory.

Automatic seat adjustment

To move the seat to the position in which youleft it:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the sameremote control (the one used to lock thedoors)

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat will automatically move to theposition in which you left it.

NOTE

• The key memory is independent of theseat memory.

• The seat will move to this position evenif someone else has moved it to a dif-ferent seating position and locked thevehicle with a different remote control.

• This feature will work in the same waywith all of the remote control transmit-ters that you use with your vehicle.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see the information beginning on page122.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressone of the buttons to stop the seat.

WARNING

• Because the driver's seat can beadjusted with the ignition off, childrenshould never be left unattended in thevehicle.

• Movement of the seat can be STOPPEDat any time by pressing any button onthe power seat control panel.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. Theseat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• The seat rails on the floor must not beobstructed in any way when the seat isin motion.

Heated/ventilated seats*

See page 129.


Seats

03

��

85

Rear seats

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded downtogether, or separately, to make it easier totransport long objects.

1. Pull the release control handle(s).

2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen-ter seat head restraint if necessary.

NOTE

The outboard head restraints must befolded up (in the upright position) beforelowering the backrests.

WARNING

• Keep vehicle doors and trunk lockedand keep keys out of a child’s reach.Unsupervised children could lock them-selves in an open trunk and risk injury.Children should be taught not to play invehicles.

• On hot days, the temperature in thetrunk or vehicle interior can rise veryquickly. Exposure of people to thesehigh temperatures for even a shortperiod of time can cause heat-relatedinjury or death. Small children are par-ticularly at risk.

WARNING

• When the backrest(s) are returned to theupright position, check that it is properlylocked in place. The red indicatorsshould not be visible.

• Return the outboard head restraints tothe upright position.

• Long loads should always be securelyanchored to help avoid injury in theevent of a sudden stop.

• Always turn the engine off and apply theparking brake when loading/unloadingthe vehicle.

• Place the transmission in the Park (P)position to help prevent inadvertentmovement of the gear selector.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure of people to these high tem-peratures for even a short period of timecan cause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.


Seats

03

86

Rear center head restraint

G02

1136

Pull the head restraint up as required. To lower,press the button at the base of the head

restraint’s left support while pressing the headrestrain down.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint shouldonly be in its lowest position when this seatis NOT occupied. When the center positionis occupied, the head restraint should becorrectly adjusted to the passenger’sheight. The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear.

Automatically lowering the rear seat’s

outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode I or II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear headrestraints for improved visibility.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should beallowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-tions if the head restraints are folded down.If these positions are occupied, the headrestraints should be in the upright (fixed)position.

NOTE

• The head restraint must be returned tothe upright position manually.

• The outboard head restraints cannot befolded down on models that are notequipped with this button.


Seats S80 Executive

03

��

87

Front seats

G03

0131

Button for moving the passenger's seatforward/rearward

Button for massage and lumbar support

Massage

G03

0132

Button for activating the massage function

Firm massage

Gentle massage

Each front seat has a massage function in itsbackrest. The massage action is done with aircushions, which can be adjusted to a firm orgentle setting. When the setting has beenmade, the massaging action is carried out incycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.

When the button is in the center position or ifthe ignition is in mode 0, the massage functionis switched off.

Lumbar support

G03

0227

Button for adjusting lumbar support

The lumbar support uses the same air cushionsas the massage function. The button can beused to adjust the amount of support in fourdirections, as shown in the illustration.

Lumbar support can be only be adjusted whenthe massage function is switched off.

A memory function stores the lumbar supportsetting and this support will resume after themassage function has been switched off orafter the vehicle has been parked for anextended period of time.


Seats S80 Executive

03

88

Moving the passenger's seat

G03

0137

The front passenger's seat can be moved for-ward/rearward from the driver's seat or the rearseat.

Press the front section of the button to movethe seat forward or the rear section of the but-ton to move the seat rearward. This buttondoes not affect the backrest tilt.


Steering wheel

03


Adjusting

G02

1138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steeringwheel

Possible positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for bothheight and reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release thesteering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is difficult topush into place, press the steering wheellightly at the same time as you push thelever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing.

With the optional speed-dependent powersteering the level of steering force can beadjusted, see page 158.

Keypads

Keypads in the steering wheel

Cruise control, see page 159. Adaptivecruise control*, see page 167.

Audio controls, see page 133.

Horn

Horn

� Press the steering wheel hub to sound thehorn.


Lighting

03

90

Lighting panel

G02

2854

Overview, light switches

Thumb wheel1 for adjusting display andinstrument lighting

Rear fog light

Front fog lights

Headlights/parking lights

Instrument lighting

Illumination of the display and instrument lightswill vary, depending on ignition mode.

The display lighting is automatically subduedin darkness and the sensitivity is set with thethumb wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting isadjusted with the thumb wheel.

High/low beam headlights

21

G02

2855

Headlight switch and lever

Daytime running lights/no

high beams

Parking lights

Low beams

Low beams

When the engine is started, the low beams areactivated automatically (daytime running lights)if the headlight control is in position 0 or

.

Daytime running lights can be deactivated bya trained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian.

NOTE

• The use of daytime running lights ismandatory in Canada.

• Continuous high beams cannot be acti-vated when the headlight switch is inposition or 0. High beam flash willfunction in these positions.

High beam flash

� Move the lever toward the steering wheelto position . The high beams come onuntil the lever is released.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams

1. Set the ignition to mode II.

1 On the S80 Executive, the thumb wheel also adjusts the lighting level in the door handles, storage compartments in the doors, the analogue clock, the cup holders between the front seats and thefront footwell lighting.


Lighting

03

��


2. With the light switch in position , pullthe turn signal lever toward the steeringwheel to position to toggle betweenhigh and low beams (this also applies onmodels equipped with the optional ActiveBending Lights).> The symbol illuminates in the

instrument panel to indicate that thehigh beams are on.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Lightfunction deactivated (left) and activated (right)

When this function is activated, the headlightbeams adjust laterally to help light up a curveaccording to movements of the steering wheel(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

ABL is activated automatically when the engineis started and it can be deactivated/reactivatedin the menu system under Car settings

Light settings Active bi xenon lights.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or darkconditions, and only when the vehicle is inmotion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbolwill illuminate and a message will be displayedas shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explana-tion

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The systemis not func-tioningproperly andshould beinspected/repaired bya trainedand qualifiedVolvo serv-ice techni-cian.

Parking lights

G02

2907

Headlight control in position for parking lights

The front and rear parking lights can be turnedon even when the ignition is switched off.

Turn the headlight control to the center posi-tion (the license plate lighting comes on at thesame time).

The lighting also comes on when the trunk isopened in order to alert anyone travelingbehind your vehicle.


Lighting

03

92

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically whenthe brakes are applied.

Emergency brake lights (EBL)

Emergency Brake Lights, EBL, activate in theevent of sudden braking or if the ABS systemis activated. This function causes an additionaltaillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminateto help alert vehicles traveling behind.

The EBL function activates if:

• The ABS system activates for more thanapproximately a half second

• In the event of sudden braking while thevehicle is moving at speeds above approx-imately 6 mph (10 km/h)

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brakelights and additional taillights remain on for aslong as the brake pedal is depressed or untilbraking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Front fog lights

G01

4402

Button for front fog lights

The front fog lights can be switched ontogether with high/low beams or the parkinglights. However, the fog lights switch off andremain off while the high beams are on.

� Press the button to switch the fog lights on/off. The light in the button comes on whenthe fog lights are on.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of the frontfog lights may vary, depending on whereyou drive.

Rear fog light

G01

4403

Button for rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver'sside taillight cluster. The rear fog light will onlyfunction in combination with the high/lowbeam headlights or the optional front fog lights.

� Press the button to switch the rear fog lighton/off.> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and thelight in the button come on when therear fog light is switched on.


Lighting

03

��

93

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighterthan the normal tail lights and should beused only when conditions such as fog, rain,snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility forother vehicles to less than 500 ft.(150 meters).

Hazard warning flashers

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

The hazard warning flasher should be used toindicate that the vehicle has become a traffichazard.

� To activate the flashers, press the buttonin the center dash. Press the button againto turn off the flashers.

NOTE

• Regulations regarding the use of thehazard warning flasher may vary,depending on where you live.

• The hazard warning flashers will be acti-vated automatically if an airbagdeploys.

Turn signals

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turnsignals 3 times by moving the turn signal leverup or down to the first position and releasing it.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possi-ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals willbe cancelled automatically by the movement ofthe steering wheel, or the lever can be returnedto its initial position by hand.

NOTE

• This automatic flashing sequence canbe interrupted by immediately movingthe lever in the opposite direction.

• If the turn signal indicator flashes fasterthan normal, check for a burned-outturn signal bulb.


Lighting

03


Interior lighting, front

G02

1149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light, on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

The lighting in the front part of the passengercompartment is controlled with the buttons (1)and (2) in the roof console.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passengercompartment lighting:

• Off – right side depressed, automatic light-ing off.

• Neutral position.

• On – left side depressed, passenger com-partment lighting on.

Interior lighting, rear

G02

1150

Rear reading lights

The lights are switched on or off by pressingeach respective button.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switchon/off automatically when one of the frontdoors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches on/off automatically when the lid is opened/closed.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and off automatically when button(3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for30 seconds if:

• the vehicle is unlocked from the outsidewith the key or remote control

• the engine is switched off and the ignitionis in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

• the engine is started

• the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for twominutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can beswitched on and off manually within 30 minutesafter the vehicle has been unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and thevehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting willswitch off automatically after one minute.

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you canmake use of the home safe lighting function toilluminate the area in front of the vehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot.

2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far aspossible towards the steering wheel andrelease it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.


Lighting

03

95

The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,and footwell lighting will illuminate and remainon for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time intervalcan be set under Car settings Light

settings Home safe lighting. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 122.

Approach lighting

Approach lighting is activated by pressing theapproach light button on the remote key (seethe illustration on page 54).

When the function has been activated, theparking lights, indicator lights, door mirrorlights, license plate lighting, dome lighting anddoor step lighting come on.

The time interval for this lighting can be setunder Car settings Light settings

Approach lighting. For a description of themenu system, see page 122.

2 Factory setting


Wipers and washers

03


Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield. The windshield shouldbe thoroughly wet when the wipers arein operation.

• Before using the wipers, ice and snowshould be removed from the wind-shield/rear window. Be sure the wiperblades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers off

Move the lever to position 0 to switchoff the windshield wipers.

Single sweep

Move the lever upward from position0 to sweep the windshield one stroke

at a time for as long as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping

With the lever in this position, you canset the wiper interval by twisting the

thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speedor downward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiping

The wipers operate at normal speed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiperspeed according to the amount of water on thewindshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensorcan be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up(the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre-quently) or down (the wipers will sweep thewindshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep eachtime the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehiclemust be running or in ignition mode II and thewindshield wiper lever must be in position 0 orin the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button. The windshield wipers will make one

sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make anextra sweep. The rain sensor returns to activemode when the stalk is released back to posi-tion 0.

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-ton or press the lever down to anotherwiper position.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the key is removed from the ignition slotor five minutes after the ignition has beenswitched off.


Wipers and washers

03


CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated whenwashing the car in an automatic car wash,etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, thewipers will start inadvertently in the carwash and could be damaged.

Windshield washing

Washing function

Move the lever toward the steering wheel tostart the windshield and headlight washers.After the lever is released the wipers make sev-eral extra sweeps.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automaticallyin cold weather to help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, theheadlights are washed using two alternatives:

• Low/high beam headlights on. The head-lights will be washed the first time the wind-shield is washed. Thereafter, the head-lights will only be washed once for everyfive times the windshield is washed withina 10-minute period.

• Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-ing Lights will be washed once for everyfive times the windshield is washed. Nor-mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION

Use ample washer fluid when washing thewindshield. The windshield should be thor-oughly wet when the wipers are in opera-tion.

NOTE

One headlight is washed at a time.

IR-reflecting windshield*

Section of the windshield where the IR-coating isnot applied

An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-ting can be applied to the windshield to helpprotect the cabin from the sun's heat and thefading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,etc.

Electronic equipment such as garage dooropeners, electronic toll tags and similar devi-ces should not be placed on sections of thewindshield with the IR coating because thiscould affect their function and limit their range.

For best performance, place the device on thesection of the windshield without the IR coating(see the area marked in the illustration).


Power windows

03


Power windows

G01

8516

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* anddisengaging rear power window buttons,see page 48

Rear window controls

Front window controls.

WARNING

• Always remove the ignition key whenthe vehicle is unattended.

• Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

• Make sure that the windows are com-pletely unobstructed before they areoperated.

Operating

G01

8517

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

All power windows can be operated using thecontrol panel in the driver's door. The controlpanels in the other doors only operate the win-dow in the respective doors.

For the power windows to function, the ignitionmust be in at least mode I. When the vehiclehas been running, the power windows can beoperated for several minutes after the remotekey has been removed from the ignition slot, oruntil a door has been opened.

NOTE

• Movement of the windows will stop ifthey are obstructed in any way.

• To reduce buffeting wind noise if therear windows are opened, also open thefront windows slightly.

Manual up/down

� Move one of the controls up/down slightly.> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

� Move one of the controls up/down as faras possible and release it.> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the autoopen function must be reset so that it will workproperly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the buttonto close the window and hold it for onesecond.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button againfor one second.


Power windows

03


Laminated glass*

This glass is reinforced to help pro-vide protection against break-ins andimproved sound insulation in thepassenger compartment.

The windshield, optional monroof and otherwindows have laminated glass.

Sun shade*

Hook and lock tab

The sun shade is integrated into the panels onboth rear doors.

1. Pull up the sun shade and hook it into theupper edge of the door frame.

2. Lock the sun shade in place by pulling locktab upward.

The window can be opened and closed, evenif the sun shade is in use.


Mirrors

03


Power door mirrors

G01

8518

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirroror the R button for the right door mirror.The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecenter.

3. Press the L or R button again. The lightshould no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur-ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/drivingin narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at thesame time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-ond. The mirrors automatically stop in thefully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the Land R buttons at the same time. The mirrorsautomatically stop in the fully extended posi-tion.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-ory when the vehicle has been locked with theremote key. When the vehicle is unlocked withthe same remote control the mirrors and thedriver's seat adopt the stored positions whenthe driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-tem, see page 122.

Tilting the door mirror when parking*

The door mirrors can be tilted down to helpgive the driver a better view along the sides ofthe vehicle, for example when parallel parking.

To acitvate this function, select reverse gearand press the L or R mirror control button to tiltthe mirror down.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

• after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-gaged and the car remains stopped.

• immediately when reverse is disengagedand the vehicle's forward speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• immediately if you press the correspond-ing L or R button again.

• when the engine is turned off.

• when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Automatic retraction when locking

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with theremote key the door mirrors are automaticallyretracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings Retract mirrors when

locking. For a description of the menu system,see page 122.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be electrically reset


Mirrors

03

101

to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work.

• Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-tons.

• Fold them out again with the L and R but-tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors comes on whenapproach lighting or home safe lighting isselected, see page 94.

Rear window and door mirrordefrosters

Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and icefrom the rear window and the door mirrors.

Press the button once to start simultaneousrear window and door mirror defrosting. Thelight in the button indicates that the function isactive. Defrosting is deactivated automaticallyand its duration is controlled by the outsidetemperature.

The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto-matically if the vehicle is started in an outsidetemperature lower than 45 °F (7 °C).

Defrosting can be selected under Climate

settings Auto. rear defroster. Selectbetween On or Off.

Interior rearview mirror

Auto-dim function

An integrated sensor reacts to headlights fromfollowing traffic and automatically reducesglare in the mirror.


Power moonroof

03

102

Introduction

The moonroof controls are located in the ceil-ing console near the rearview mirror. Themoonroof can be opened vertically and hori-zontally. The vehicle's must be in ignition modeI or II for the moonroof to be operated.

CAUTION

• Remove ice and snow before openingthe moonroof.

• Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-zen closed.

• Never place heavy objects on themoonroof.

Sliding moonroof

G02

1343

Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Automatic opening

� Pull the switch as far back as possible (tothe position for automatic opening) andrelease it to automatically fully slide openthe moonroof.

Manual opening

� Pull the switch back to the first stop (theposition for manual opening) and hold ituntil the moonroof has opened to the posi-tion of your choice.

Manual closing

� Push the switch forward to the first stop(the position for manual closing) and holdit until the moonroof has closed to the posi-tion of your choice, or has closed com-pletely.

Automatic closing

� Push the switch as far forward as possible(the position for automatic closing) andrelease it to automatically close the moon-roof.

WARNING

• During manual closing, if the moonroofis obstructed, immediately open itagain.

• Never open or close the moonroof if it isobstructed in any way.

• Never allow a child to operate themoonroof.

• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

• Never extend any object or body partthough the open moonroof, even if thevehicle's ignition is completelyswitched off.


Power moonroof

03

103

Tilt position

G02

8899

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-trol downward and hold it until the moon-roof has closed completely.

Visor

The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visorslides open automatically when the moonroofis opened, and must be closed manually.


HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

03


Introduction

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,security systems, even home lighting. Addi-tional HomeLink information can be found onthe Internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING

• If you use HomeLink to open a garagedoor or gate, be sure no one is near thegate or door while it is in motion.

• When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park outside ofthe garage.

• Do not use HomeLink with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stop andreverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includesany garage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). A garagedoor that cannot detect an object - sig-naling the door to stop and reverse -does not meet current U.S. federalsafety standards. For more information,contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF deviceyou are programming for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink programming. Itis also suggested that upon the sale of thevehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons beerased for security purposes. Refer to “ErasingHomeLink Buttons”.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignitionswitch to be turned on or to the second(“accessories”) position for programmingand/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-ommended that a new battery be placed inthe hand-held transmitter of the devicebeing programmed to HomeLink for quickertraining and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from theHomeLink button you wish to programwhile keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-ter buttons until the HomeLink indicatorlight changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-ing light. Now you may release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-tons.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.



03

��


NOTE

Some devices may require you to replacethis Programming Step 2 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-ing light after performing these steps, con-tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-ton up to two separate times to activate thedoor. If the door does not activate, pressand hold the just-trained HomeLink buttonand observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate whenthe HomeLink button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-gramming of a rolling code equippeddevice (most commonly a garage dooropener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.) Thereare 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, holdfor two seconds and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence a secondtime, and, depending on the brand of thegarage door opener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programmingprocess.

HomeLink should now activate your rollingcode equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission – which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-ties programming a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-tor light changes from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may release boththe HomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activation willnow occur for the trained device (i.e., garagedoor opener, gate operator, security system,entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). Forconvenience, the hand-held transmitter of thedevice may also be used at any time. In theevent that there are still programming difficul-ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.



03


Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three Home-Link buttons (individual buttons cannot beerased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlinedbelow), follow the step noted:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger that 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) modeand can be programmed at any time beginningwith “Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, followthese steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-Link button, proceed with “Programming”- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkat: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference that may be received includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate thedevice.2

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.


Starting the engine

03

��


Start

Ignition switch with remote key inserted (seepage 80 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

• Fasten the seat belt.

• Check that the seat, steering wheel andmirrors are adjusted properly.

• Make sure the brake pedal can bedepressed completely. Adjust the seatif necessary.

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slotwith the buttons upward and the metallickey blade pointing outward (not insertedinto the slot)1.

G03

3763

2. Push lightly on the remote key. It will beautomatically drawn into the ignition slot inthe correct position.

3

G03

3764

3. Depress the brake pedal2. Press andrelease the START/STOP ENGINE button.The autostart function will operate thestarter motor until the engine starts.

The starter motor operates for a maximumof 10 seconds. If the engine has notstarted, repeat the procedure.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the keylessdrive feature, one of the remote keys mustbe in the passenger compartment. Followthe instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.


Starting the engine

03

108

WARNING

An extra mat on the driver's floor can causethe accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch.Check that the movement of these pedals isnot impeded. Not more than one protectivefloor covering may be used at one time.

WARNING

• Always remove the remote key from theignition slot when leaving the vehicle,especially if there are children in thevehicle.

• Never remove the remote key from theignition slot while driving or when thevehicle is being towed. The steeringlock could otherwise be activated, mak-ing it impossible to steer the vehicle. Onvehicles with the optional keyless drive,never remove the remote key from thevehicle while driving or during towing.

• Always place the gear selector in Parkand apply the parking brake beforeleaving the vehicle. Never leave thevehicle unattended with the engine run-ning.

• Always open garage doors fully beforestarting the engine inside a garage toensure adequate ventilation. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monox-ide, which is invisible and odorless butvery poisonous.

NOTE

• After a cold start, idle speed may benoticeably higher than normal for ashort period. This is done to help bringcomponents in the emission controlsystem to their normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, whichenables them to control emissions andhelp reduce the vehicle's impact on theenvironment3.

• Keylock: Your vehicle is equipped witha keylock system. When the engine isswitched off, the gear selector must bein the Park position before the key canbe removed4 from the ignition slot.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.4 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.


Starting the engine

03

��

109

CAUTION

• When starting in cold weather, the auto-matic transmission may shift up atslightly higher engine speeds than nor-mal until the automatic transmissionfluid reaches normal operating tem-perature.

• Do not race a cold engine immediatelyafter starting. Oil flow may not reachsome lubrication points fast enough toprevent engine damage.

• The engine should be idling when youmove the gear selector. Never acceler-ate until after you feel the transmissionengage. Accelerating immediately afterselecting a gear will cause harshengagement and premature transmis-sion wear.

• Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-still for prolonged periods of time willhelp prevent overheating of the auto-matic transmission fluid.

Switching off the engine

With the engine running, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or ifthe vehicle is moving, press the button twice orpress and hold it in until the engine switchesoff.

Jump starting

G02

1347

Connecting the jumper cables

Follow these instructions to jump start yourvehicle's dead battery or to jump start anothervehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in anothervehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition tomode 0, see page 80).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to theauxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal .

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)terminal on your vehicle's battery ,marked with a "+" sign, located under afolding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux-iliary battery's negative (–) terminal andto the ground point in your vehicle's enginecompartment (right engine mount at thetop, on the outer screw) .

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,then start the engine in the vehicle withdead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first removethe negative (–) terminal jumper cable(black). Then remove the positive (+) termi-nal jumper cable (red).


Starting the engine

03

110

WARNING


Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully toavoid short circuits with other componentsin the engine compartment.

WARNING

• Do not connect the jumper cable to anypart of the fuel system or to any movingparts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

• Batteries generate hydrogen gas, whichis flammable and explosive.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Failure to follow the instructions forjump starting can lead to injury.


Transmission

03

��

111

Automatic transmission

G02

1351

Shiftgate positions1

Depress the button on the front of the gearselector knob to move the gear selectorbetween the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely betweenthe Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)positions while driving.

Park position (P)

Select the P position when starting or parking.

Keylock

To remove the remote key from the ignitionslot, the gear selector must be in the P position.The remote key is locked in the slot in all otherpositions.

Shiftlock

When P has been selected, the transmission ismechanically blocked in this position. Thebrake pedal must be depressed before thegear lever can be moved from the P position.

Always apply the parking brake when the vehi-cle is parked, see page 116. If the vehicle isequipped with the optional electric parkingbrake, press the control to apply the brake, seepage 116.

G02

1350

CAUTION

The vehicle must be stationary when posi-tion P is selected.

Reverse (R)

The vehicle must be stationary when positionR is selected.

Neutral position (N)

No gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted with the gear selector in this position.Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-tionary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D)

D is the normal driving position. The car auto-matically shifts between the various forwardgears, based on the level of acceleration andspeed. The car must be at a standstill whenshifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic–manual shifting

Geartronic allows you to manually shift amongyour vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartroniccan be selected at any time.

• To access the manual shifting positionfrom Drive (D), move the gear selector tothe right (to the area marked M in the illus-tration or to S on models equipped withSport mode).

1 The information display (see page 73) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.


Transmission

03

112

NOTE

On models equipped with Sport mode, thetransmission will not switch to manual shift-ing mode until the gear selector is movedforward or rearward. The selected gear willthen be shown in the information display(see page 73).

• To return to the D position from the manualshifting position or Sport mode, move thegear selector to the left.

While driving

• If you select the manual shifting positionwhile driving, the gear that was being usedin the Drive position will also initially beselected in the manual shifting position.

• Move the gear selector forward (toward"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", thetransmission will downshift one gear at atime and will utilize the braking power ofthe engine. If the current speed is too highfor using a lower gear, the downshift willnot occur until the speed has decreasedenough to allow the lower gear to be used.

• If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and thevehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec-onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-ning) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N toanother gear position, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the ignition must be in posi-tion II, see page 80.

Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift-ing mode can help provide better traction whenstarting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move thegear selector to the right from the D posi-tion to the manual shifting position. Thetext in the instrument panel display willchange from D to 1.

2. Press the gear selector forward andrelease it (this selects 2nd gear). Press theselector forward again and release it toselect 3rd gear.

3. Release the brake pedal and press gentlyon the accelerator pedal.

Shiftlock override

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for examplebecause of a dead battery, the gear selectormust be moved from the P position before thevehicle can be moved2.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of thestorage compartment behind the centerconsole to expose the small opening foroverriding the shiftlock system.

Insert the key blade into the opening. Pressthe key blade down as far as possible andkeep it held down. Move the gear selectorfrom the P position. For information on thekey blade, see page 57.

2 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 109.


Transmission

03

113

Please be aware that overriding the shiftlocksystem does not release the steering wheellock.

All Wheel Drive – AWD3

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanentAll Wheel Drive, which means that power isdistributed automatically between the frontand rear wheels. Under normal driving condi-tions, most of the engine's power is directed tothe front wheels. However, if there is any ten-dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron-ically controlled coupling distributes power tothe wheels that have the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Servicerequired will be appear in the informationdisplay if an electrical fault should occur inthe AWD system. A warning light will alsoilluminate in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, have the system checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian.

3 Standard on certain models.


Brakes

03

114

Brake system

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob-lem should occur in one of these circuits, it isstill possible to stop the vehicle with the otherbrake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed fartherthan normal and requires greater foot pressure,the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will lightup to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintainpressure on the pedal – do not pump thebrakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a brake system message isshown in the information display: DO NOTDRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician andhave the brake system inspected.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressurewhich is only created when the engine is run-ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with theengine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-ably higher pressure will be required on thebrake pedal to compensate for the lack ofpower assistance. This can happen for exam-ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine isswitched off when the vehicle is rolling. Thebrake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through anautomatic car wash can cause water to collecton the brake discs and pads. This will cause adelay in braking effect when the pedal isdepressed. To avoid such a delay when thebrakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.This will remove the water from the brakes.Check that brake application feels normal. Thisshould also be done after washing or startingin very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strainwhen driving in mountains or hilly areas, orwhen towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of thebrakes is less efficient than when driving onlevel roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,shift into a lower gear and let the engine helpwith the braking. Do not forget that if you aretowing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected toa greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps toimprove vehicle control (stopping and steering)during severe braking conditions by limitingbrake lockup. When the system "senses"impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-matically modulated in order to help preventlockup that could lead to a skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostictest when the engine has been started anddriver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-matic test may be performed when the vehiclefirst reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph(40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate severaltimes and a sound may be audible from theABS control module. This is normal.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discsmay result in delayed brake function. This delayis minimized by cleaning the brake linings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wetweather, prior to long-term parking, and afterthe vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak-


Brakes

03

115

ing gently for a short period while the vehicle ismoving.

Emergency Brake Assistance

EBA is designed to provide full brake effectimmediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-ing. The system is activated by the speed withwhich the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brakepedal will go down and pressure in the brakesystem immediately increases to the maximumlevel. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedalin order to utilize the system completely. EBAis automatically deactivated when the brakepedal is released.

NOTE

• When the EBA system is activated, thebrake pedal will go down and pressurein the brake system immediately increa-ses to the maximum level. You mustmaintain full pressure on the brakepedal in order to utilize the system com-pletely. There will be no braking effect ifthe pedal is released. EBA is automati-cally deactivated when the brake pedalis released.

• When the vehicle has been parked forsome time, the brake pedal may sinkmore than usual when the engine isstarted. This is normal and the pedal willreturn to its usual position when it isreleased.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brakefluid level. If the level is low, fillwith brake fluid and check forthe cause of the brake fluidloss.

Steady glow for two secondswhen the engine is started –There was a fault in the brakesystem's ABS function whenthe engine was last running.

WARNING

If and come on at the same timeand the brake level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake system-relatedmessage is shown in the information dis-play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician and have the brake systeminspected.


Parking brake

03

116

Electric parking brake

An electric parking brake has the same func-tion as a manual parking brake.

NOTE

• A faint sound from the parking brake'selectric motor can be heard when theparking brake is being applied. Thissound can also be heard during theautomatic function check of the parkingbrake.

• The brake pedal will move slightly whenthe electric parking brake is applied orreleased.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the parkingbrake cannot be applied or released. Connectan auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is toolow, see page 109.

Applying the electric parking brake

G02

1354

Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Push the control.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure thatthe vehicle is at a standstill.

4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selec-tor must be in position P.

The symbol in the instrument panelflashes while the parking bake is being applied,and glows steadily when the parking brake hasbeen fully applied.

NOTE

• In an emergency the parking brake canbe applied when the vehicle is movingby holding in the control. Braking will beinterrupted when the accelerator pedalis depressed or the control is released.

• An audible signal will sound during thisprocedure if the vehicle is moving atspeeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Parking on a hill

• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the frontwheels so that they point away from thecurb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn thefront wheels so that they point toward thecurb.


Parking brake

03

��


Releasing the electric parking brake

G02

1359

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot.


4. Pull the parking brake control.

Vehicles with Keyless drive*

1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button.


3. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

• For safety reasons, the parking brake isonly released automatically if the engineis running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt.

• The electric parking brake will bereleased immediately when the acceler-ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec-tor is in position D or P.

2. Fasten the seat belt

3. Move the gear selector to position D or Rand press the accelerator pedal. The park-ing brake will release when the vehiclebegins to move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause thevehicle to roll backward when the parkingbrake is released automatically on a steepincline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake leverpushed in with the left hand while shiftinginto Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pullaway, release the parking brake lever onlyafter the vehicle begins to move.

Symbols

Symbol Specification

Read the message in the infor-mation display

A flashing symbol indicates thatthe parking brake is beingapplied. If the symbol flashes inany other situation then thismeans that a fault has arisen.Read the message on the infor-mation display.

Messages

G01

6556

Parking brake not fully released – A fault ispreventing the parking brake from beingreleased. Contact an authorized Volvo work-


Parking brake

03

118

shop. If you drive off with this error messageshowing, a warning signal sounds.

Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre-venting the parking brake from being applied.Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo work-shop if the message remains.

Parking brake Service required – A fault hasarisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the faultremains.

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the faulthas been corrected, always put the gearselector in P and turn the wheels so thatthey point away from the curb if the vehicleis pointing uphill or toward the curb if it ispointing downhill.


03

119

G020908


Menus and messages........................................................................... 122Climate system..................................................................................... 126Audio system........................................................................................ 133

Bluetooth® hands-free connection....................................................... 147Trip computer........................................................................................ 153Compass............................................................................................... 155Stability system..................................................................................... 156Active chassis system–Four C.............................................................. 158Cruise control........................................................................................ 159Collision warning with Auto-brake*....................................................... 161Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 167Distance alert ....................................................................................... 174Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 177Park assist*........................................................................................... 182Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 185Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 189Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive ........................ 192

04COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE


Menus and messages

04


Center console

Certain functions are controlled from the centerconsole via the menu system or from the key-pad in the steering wheel. Each function isdescribed under its respective section.

The current menu level is shown at the top rightof display in the center console.

Center console controls

Center console with information display and con-trols for menus

Navigation button – scrolls and selectsamong menu options

ENTER – selects menu options

MENU – accesses the menu system

EXIT – leads back one step in the menustructure. A long press exits the menu sys-tem.

Steering wheel keypad

ENTER

EXIT

Navigation buttons.

Buttons (1-3) on the steering wheel keypadhave the same function as those in the centerconsole.

Search paths

Access to some functions is provided directlyvia the function buttons and others areaccessed through the menu system.

Search paths to the menu system functions arelisted as follows: Car settings Lock

settings, if the following steps have been takenfirst:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER.

The navigation button can be used instead ofENTER and EXIT when navigating the menuhierarchy. The right arrow is equal to ENTER

and the left arrow to EXIT.

The menu options are numbered and can alsobe selected directly with the numerical keypad(1–9 only).

Menu overview

NOTE

Menu selections will not be available (will be"grayed out") when the vehicle is moving.

Car key memory

Seat & mirror positions

Car settings

Collision warning settings*

Light settings

Lock settings

Reduced guard1

Tire pressure


Menus and messages

04

��


Door mirror settings

Parking camera settings (accessory)

Lane departure warning*

Steering force level*

Information

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

Recirculation timer

Auto. rear defroster

Reset climate settings

Main menu AM

HD radio

Audio settings2

Sound stage

Equalizer, front

Equalizer, rear

Auto. volume control

Resets all audio settings.

Main menu FM

HD radio

FM settings

Radio text

Advanced radio settings

Audio settings

Main menu CD

Random

Off

Folder

Disc

Single disc

All discs

CD settings

Track information*

Audio settings

Main menu AUX

Volume, AUX input

Audio settings

Main menu USB

USB settings

Audio settings

Track information*

Main iPod menu

iPod settings

Audio settings

Track information*

Main Bluetooth menu

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Phone book

Search

Copy fr. mobile phone

Bluetooth*

Connect phone

Change phone

Remove phone

Phone settings

Call options

Sounds and volume

Synchronize phone book

1 Certain models2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources.


Menus and messages

04

124

Main instrument panel

G02

2908

Information display and menu controls

READ – access to the list of messages andmessage confirmation.

Thumbwheel – browse among menus andoptions in the list of functions.

RESET – reset the active function. Used incertain cases to select/activate a function,see the explanation under each respectivefunction.

The menus shown on the information displaysin the instrument panel are controlled with theleft lever. The menus shown depend on ignitionmode. Press READ to erase a message andreturn to the menus.

Menu overview

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

Average

Instantaneous:

Average speed

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

DSTC

Message

G02

8940

When a warning, information or indicator sym-bol comes on, a corresponding messageappears on the information display. An errormessage is stored in a memory list until thefault is rectified.

Press READ to acknowledge and scroll amongthe messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, the message mustbe read and confirmed by pressing READbefore the previous activity can beresumed.

Message Description

Stop safely Stop and switch offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.Contact an author-ized Volvo work-shop.

Stopping the

engine

Stop and switch offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.Contact an author-ized Volvo work-shop.

Service urgent Have the vehiclechecked by anauthorized Volvoworkshop immedi-ately.


Menus and messages

04

125

Message Description

Service required Have the vehiclechecked by anauthorized Volvoworkshop as soonas possible.

See manual Read the owner'smanual.

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book serviceat an authorizedVolvo retailer.

Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regularservice at an author-ized Volvo work-shop. The timing isdetermined by thenumber of milesdriven, number ofmonths since thelast service, enginerunning time.

Message Description

Maintenance over-

due

If the service inter-vals are not fol-lowed, the warrantydoes not cover anydamaged parts.Contact an author-ized Volvo workshopfor service.

Temporarily OFF A function has beentemporarilyswitched off and isreset automaticallywhile driving or afterstarting again.

Power save mode The audio system isswitched off to savecurrent. Charge thebattery.


Climate system

04


Introduction

Air conditioning

The vehicle is equipped with Electronic ClimateControl (ECC). The climate control systemcools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas-senger compartment.

NOTE

• The air conditioning can be switchedoff, but to ensure the best possible cli-mate comfort in the passenger com-partment and to prevent the windowsfrom misting, it should always be on.

• In warm weather, a small amount ofwater may accumulate under the carwhen it has been parked. This water iscondensation from the A/C system andis normal.

Sensor location

• The sunlight sensor is located on the topside of the dashboard.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors which side ofthe car that is most exposed to sunlight.This can mean that the temperature maydiffer between the right and left-side airvents, even if the temperatures set for bothsides of the passenger compartment are thesame.

• The temperature sensor for the passengercompartment is located below the climatecontrol panel.

• The outside temperature sensor is locatedon the door mirror.

• The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.

Side windows and moonroof

To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-mally, the side windows, and the optionalmoonroof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windows

The defroster function should be used toremove fog or mist from the inside of the win-dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-

mercially available window washing spray willalso help prevent fogging or misting.

Vents in the parcel shelf

NOTE

The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelfshould never be obstructed.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-gaged during full-throttle acceleration or whendriving uphill with a trailer. This may result in atemporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base ofthe windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required tomaintain and carry out repairs on the climatesystem. Work of this type should only be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The airconditioning system in your car contains aCFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substancewill not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-


Climate system

04

��

127

tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (800 g) ofR134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one atthe recommended intervals. Please refer toyour Warranty and Service Records Informa-tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for these intervals.The filter should be replaced more often whendriving under dirty and dusty conditions. Thefilter cannot be cleaned and therefore shouldalways be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particlesin the incoming air, thereby reducing the levelsof odors and contaminants entering the vehi-cle. The air quality sensor detects increasedlevels of contaminants in the outside air. Whenthe air quality sensor detects contaminatedoutside air, the air intake closes and the airinside the passenger compartment is recircu-lated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. Thefilter also cleans recirculated passenger com-partment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filterreplacement intervals.

Menu settings

The default settings for three of the climatesystem's functions can be changed in themenu system, see page 122:

• Blower speed in automatic mode, seepage 129.

• Recirculation timer for passenger com-partment air, see page 131.

• Automatic rear window defrosting, seepage 101.

The functions can also be returned to factorysettings in the menu system.

Air distribution

G02

1366

The incoming air is distributed from 20 differentvents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If desired, air distribution can be controlledmanually, see page 132.


Climate system

04


Air vents in the dashboard

G02

1367

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

G02

1368

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-ment to help maintain the desired temperaturein the rear seat.

Electronic climate control, ECC

Ventilated front driver's seat*

Blower

Heated front driver's seat*

Air distribution

Ventilated front passenger's seat*

Auto

Heated front passenger's seat*

Temperature control, passenger's side

A/C – On/Off

Heated rear window and door mirrors, seepage 101.

Defroster (maximum effect)


Climate system

04

��


Recirculation/Air quality system

Temperature control, driver's side

Ventilated front seats*

The ventilation system consists of fans in theseats and backrests that draw air through theseat upholstery. The cooling effect increasesas the air in the passenger compartmentbecomes cooler.

The ventilation is controlled by the ECC sys-tem, which takes into account the seat tem-perature, sunlight in the passenger compart-ment, and the ambient temperature.

The ventilation can be used at the same timeas seat heating.

The ventilation system can be activated whenthe engine is running. There are three comfortlevels that produce different cooling and dehu-midification effects:

• Level three: press the button once formaximum output – three indicator lightscome on.

• Level two: press the button twice for alower output – two indicator lights comeon.

• Level one: press the button three times forthe lowest output – one indicator lightcomes on.

• Press the button a fourth time to switch offthe function – the indicator light will go out.

Blower control

Turn the control clockwise toincrease or counterclockwiseto decrease the blowerspeed. Pressing the AUTO

switch will automatically reg-ulate blower speed and over-ride manual adjustment.

NOTE

If the blower is turned off completely, the airconditioning is disengaged, which mayresult in fogging on the windows.

Heated front seats*

Press the button once for thehighest heat level – three indi-cator lights come on.

Press the button twice for alower heat level – two indica-tor lights come on.

Press the button three times for the lowest heatlevel – one indicator light comes on.

Press the button four times to switch off theheat – no indicator lights come on.

Heated rear seats*

G02

1376

Heat control for the outboard seating positionstakes place in the same way as for the frontseat.

Air distribution

The figure consists of threebuttons. When the buttonsare pressed, an indicator lightin front of the respective partof the figure illuminates andshows which air distribution isselected, see page 132.


Climate system

04

130

Auto

The function automaticallyregulates cooling, heating,blower speed, recirculation,and air distribution to main-tain the chosen temperature.If you select one or more man-ual functions, the other func-

tions continue to be controlled automatically.The air quality sensor is engaged and all man-ual settings are switched off when AUTO ispressed. The display shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be setunder Climate settings Automatic blower

adjust. Choose between Low, Normal orHigh.

NOTE

Selecting the lowest blower speed mayincreases the risk of fog forming on the win-dows.

For a description of the menu system, seepage 122.

Temperature control

The temperatures on thedriver and passenger sidescan be set independently.When the vehicle is started,the most recent setting isresumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up byselecting a higher/lower temperature thanthe actual temperature required.

A/C – ON/OFF

The air conditioning is con-trolled automatically by thesystem when the ON light ison. This cools/heats anddehumidifies the incoming air.When the OFF light is on, theair conditioning is always dis-

engaged. Other functions are still controlledautomatically. When defroster is selected, theair conditioning system is set for maximumblower speed and dehumidification.

Defroster

This function defrosts/de-icesthe windshield and front sidewindows. The indicator lightin the defroster button lightswhen the function is active.

• Blower speed increases automatically andthe air conditioning will switch on (if notalready on and if the passenger compart-ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-ify the air in the passenger compartment.Air conditioning can be switched off bypressing the AC button.

• Recirculation will not function while defrostis engaged.

The climate system will return to its previoussettings when the defroster function isswitched off.


Climate system

04

��


Recirculation/air quality system

Recirculation

This function can be used toshut out exhaust fumes,smoke, etc from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis then recirculated, i.e., no airfrom outside the car is taken

into the car when this function is activated. Theindicator light in the button will illuminate whenrecirculation is selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,there is a risk of condensation forming on theinsides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-ging, or stale air when the recirculation functionis selected by automatically switching off thefunction after a certain length of time, depend-ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/deactivate the function under Climate control

settings Recirculation timer. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 122.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation isalways deactivated.

Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*

This system consists of a mul-tifilter and an air quality sen-sor. The filter helps removegases and particles from theincoming air, thereby reduc-ing the amounts of odors andcontaminants entering the

vehicle. The air quality sensor detectsincreased levels of contaminants in the outsideair. When the air quality sensor detects conta-minated outside air, the air intake closes andthe air inside the passenger compartment isrecirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehi-cle. The filter also cleans recirculated passen-ger compartment air. When the AUTO buttonis depressed the air quality sensor is alwaysengaged.

Activating the air quality sensor

Switch between the threefunctions by pressing the but-ton repeatedly.

• The left orange light comes on – the airquality sensor is disengaged.

• The center green light comes on – recircu-lation not engaged, providing it is notrequired for cooling in hot weather.

• The right orange light comes on – recircu-lation is engaged.

NOTE

• The air quality sensor should always beengaged in order to obtain the best airin the passenger compartment.

• Recirculation is limited in cold weatherto avoid fogging.

• If the insides of the windows start fog-ging, disengage the air quality sensor.Use the defroster function to increaseairflow to the front, side, and rear win-dows.


Climate system

04

132

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some airflows from the dashboardair vents. The air is notrecirculated. Air condition-ing is always engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-ice the front side win-dows and windshieldquickly.

Air to the floor and windows.Some air flows from thedashboard air vents.

To ensure comfortableconditions and good de-fogging in cold or humidweather.

Air to windshield and sidewindows. Some air flowsfrom the air dashboardvents.

In cold or humidweather (blowerspeed should bemoderate to high).

Air to floor and from dash-board air vents.

In sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.

Airflow to windows andfrom dashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-fort in warm, dryweather.

Air to floor. Some air flows tothe dashboard air vents andwindows.

To warm or cool the feet.

Airflow to the head andchest from the dashboardair vents.

To ensure efficientcooling in warmweather.

Airflow to windows, fromdashboard air vents and tothe floor.

To cool the feet or pro-vide warmer air to theupper body in coldweather or hot, dryweather.


Audio system

04

��


Introduction

The audio system is available in two versions:High Performance and Premium Sound. Thesystem version is shown in the display whenthe audio system is switched on.

If the audio system is on when the ignition isswitched off, it will come on automatically thenext time the ignition is put in mode I or higher.The audio system can be operated without akey in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a timeby pressing the POWER button (the driver'sdoor must be closed on vehicles with theoptional keyless drive).

Some functions are controlled from the menusystem in the center console. For more infor-mation on menus, see page 122.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. The Dolby SurroundPro Logic II System is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-poration.

Overview

Socket for external audio source (AUX,USB, iPod 1)*


Center console control panel

Control panel with headphones socket*


Confirm selection in menu system andcontrols for a bluetooth-connected cellphone (see page 147).

Go higher in the menu system. Interruptcurrent function.

Volume

A short press scrolls between CD tracks orpreset radio stations. A long presssearches within CD tracks or searches forradio stations automatically.

Please note that these functions are also avail-able through the audio system controls on cen-ter console.

1 iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.


Audio system

04


Audio functions

Center console, controls for audio functions

Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD

External audio source. For connection, seepage 133

Push button and knob controls for makingsound settings

Navigation button

Volume and on/off

Audio volume and automatic volume

control

The audio system compensates for disruptingnoises in the passenger compartment byincreasing the volume according to the speed

of the vehicle. The level of sound compensa-tion can be set at low, medium or high. Selectthe level under Audio settings Auto

volume control.

External audio source audio volume

External devices such as an MP3 player can beconnected to the AUX input, see page 133. Thevolume of the external sound source AUX maybe different from the volume of the internalsound sources such as the CD player or theradio. If the external sound source's volume istoo high, the quality of the sound may beimpaired. To help prevent this, adjust the inputvolume of the external audio source:

1. Set the audio system in AUX mode usingMODE and use (4) to navigate to Volume,

AUX input.

2. Turn the control (3) or press / the nav-igation button.

Sound settings

Press the control (3) repeatedly to toggleamong the sound settings. Adjustments aremade by turning the control (3).

• Bass – Bass level.

• Treble – Treble level.

• Fader – Balance between the front andrear speakers.

• Balance – Balance between the right andleft speakers.

• Subwoofer* – Level for the bass speaker.The subwoofer can be switched off byturning control (3) counterclockwise toMIN.

• Surround* – Surround settings.

Under Surround, 3 channel stereo or DolbySurround Pro logic II can be activated byselecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-bles the following options:

• Center level2 – Level for the centerspeaker.

• Surround level2 – Level for surroundsound.

Equalizer

Sound levels for different frequencies can beadjusted separately using the equalizer3.

1. Go to Audio settings and selectEqualizer Front or Equalizer Rear.

The sound level for the frequency isadjusted with / on the navigation but-ton. Press / to select another fre-quency.

2 Premium Sound3 Certain audio systems


Audio system

04

��

135

2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.

Sound stage4

The sound experience can be optimized for thedriver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.Select one of the options underAudio settings Soundstage.

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimalsound reproduction using digital signal pro-cessing.

This calibration takes into account factors suchas the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, thelisteners' seating positions, etc., for each com-bination of vehicle/audio system.

There is also a dynamic calibration that takesinto consideration the volume level, radioreception, and the speed of the vehicle.

The settings that are described in this manual,such as Bass, Treble, and Equalizer are onlyintended to enable the user to adapt soundreproduction to his/her personal tastes.

Radio functions

Center console, controls for radio functions

Navigation button for automatic tuning

Press to cancel a menu selection or aselected function

Manual tuning

Scan the current wave band

Auto store the strongest radio stations inthe area in which you are driving

Station preset buttons

Select wave band AM and FM (FM1 andFM2)

Automatic tuning

1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.

2. Press / on the navigation button.

Manual tuning


2. Turn TUNING to select a station.

Preset stations

Ten station presets can be stored for eachwave band. FM has two memories for presets:FM1 and FM2. The stored presets are selectedusing the preset buttons.

Preset storage can be carried out manually orautomatically.

Manually storing preset stations

1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold in one of the preset buttons until themessage Channel stored appears on thedisplay.

Automatically storing preset stations

The function is especially useful in areas wherethe radio stations and their frequencies areunfamiliar. The ten strongest radio stations arestored automatically in a separate memory.


4 Certain markets only.


Audio system

04


2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring…

appears on the display.

Once Autostoring… disappears from the dis-play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on thedisplay. The automatically stored presets cannow be selected using the preset buttons.Automatic preset storage can be cancelledusing EXIT.

Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-ple AUTO or FM.

Returning to Auto mode provides access to theautostored presets:

1. Press AUTO.> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button.

Scan

The function automatically searches the cur-rent wave band for strong stations. When astation is found, it is played for approx. eightseconds before scanning is resumed. Whilethe station is playing it can be stored as a pre-set as usual.

NOTE

Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func-tion.

1. Select a wave band using AM or FM.

2. Press SCAN.> SCAN appears on the display. Close

using SCAN or EXIT.

Radio text

Some stations transmit information on pro-gram content, artists, etc. This information canbe shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio

text.

USB/iPod connector*

AUX and USB sockets in the storage compartmentbetween the front seats

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod , MP3player or a USB flash drive can be connectedto the audio system via the connectors in the

center console storage compartment. A stand-ard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can berouted under the cover to the AUX connectorin the storage compartment.

A sound source must be chosen, depending onthe device that has been connected:

1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The textCONNECT DEVICE will be displayed.

2. Connect the device to the connector in thecenter console storage compartment (seethe illustration).

The text LOADING will be displayed while thesystem loads the files (folder structure) on thedevice. This may take a short time.

When information about the files (the folderstructure) on the device has been loaded, theresulting list includes information on the artist,genre and song title.

To navigate in the folder structure, pressENTER and scroll up and down the foldersusing the arrow buttons (on the audio systemcontrol panel or on the steering wheel keypad).Press the right arrow button to select a folder.Press the left arrow button to go up a level inthe folder structure. Press ENTER to go downa level in the folder structure.

Tracks can be selected in two ways:


Audio system

04

��


• Turn the manual tuning knob clockwise orcounterclockwise

• Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav-igation control to select the desired track.The arrow keys on the steering wheel key-pad can also be used in the same way.

NOTE

The system supports playback of files in themost common versions of formats such asmp3, wma, and wav. However, there may beversions of these formats that the systemdoes not support.

The system also supports a number ofiPod models produced in 2005 or later.iPod Shuffle is not supported.

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it isadvisable to only store music files on the drive.It will take considerably longer for the systemto index the files on the drive if it contains any-thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media thatuses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32file system and can index up to 500 foldersand a maximum of 64,000 files. The devicemust have at least 256 Mb of memory.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have a file indexing systemthat is not supported by the vehicle's audiosystem. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys-tem must be set to USB Removable device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod

An iPod receives current and its battery ischarged through the connecting cord. How-ever, if the iPod's battery is completelydrained, it should be recharged before theiPod is connected to the audio system.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as a sound source,the vehicle's audio system has a menustructure similar to the one in the iPod . Seethe iPod's manual for detailed information.

For further information, refer to the accessorymanual USB/iPod Music Interface.

Rear control panel with headphonessocket*

Headphones with an impedance of16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higherare recommended for best sound reproduc-tion.

Volume control (right/left sides)

Scroll/search forward and back

MODE – select AM, FM, HD Radio 5, CD,AUX, USB/iPod * and ON/OFF.

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating

The control panel is activated by pressingMODE when the audio system is switched on.

5 Available on U.S. models only


Audio system

04

138

It is switched off automatically when the audiosystem is switched off or by a long press onMODE.

Scroll/search forward and backward

Short presses on (2) are used to scroll betweenCD tracks or preset radio stations. Longpresses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or tosearch for radio stations automatically.

Limitations

The audio source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) beingplayed in the speakers cannot be controlledfrom the rear control panel.

HD Radio reception (U.S. modelsonly)

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radiobroadcast

NOTE

HD radio volume may fade in and out attimes due to coverage limitations.

HD radio is a brand name registered by theIbiquity digital corporation6. They are thedeveloper of a broadcasting technology calledIBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers tothe method of transmitting a digital radiobroadcast signal centered on the same fre-

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"since it is both analogue and digital. Duringhybrid operation, receivers still continue toreceive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HDradio receivers incorporate both modes ofreception, where the receiver will automaticallyswitch to the analogue signal if the digital signalcannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,the symbol will appear in the audio sys-tem display.

More information about HD radio and IBOCcan be found on Ibiquity's website,www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

• Better sound (FM sounds near CD qualityand AM as analogue FM).

• Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-ber of listening choices through “multicast-ing” (consisting of a frequency's mainchannel and any sub-channels that mayalso be available on that particular fre-

6 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp.


Audio system

04

��

139

quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-nels" below).

• When receiving a digital signal there is nomultipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radioand broadcasts of this type are available inmany areas of the United States. However,there are a few key differences:

• Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-nal, stations send out a bundled signal –both analogue and digital.

• An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-ital and analogue broadcasts. Dependingon the terrain and location of the vehicle(which will influence the signal strength),the receiver will determine which signal toreceive.

Limitations

• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channelthat can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, they are broadcast in digitalmode only. The main FM channel will bedisplayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate thereare sub-channels available) The sub-FM

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

• Reception coverage area: Due to currentIBOC transmitter power limitations, thereception coverage area in digital mode issomewhat more limited than the station'sanalogue coverage area. Please be awarethat as with any radio broadcast technol-ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level andbuilding location can have positive or neg-ative effects on radio reception.

• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending willoccur as the signal strength reaches a pre-set threshold in the receiver. This will benoticeable in fringe areas (areas with weakreception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference insound quality when a change from analogueto digital or digital to analogue occurs, suchas:

• Volume increase or decrease

• Equalizer settings, i.e. Bass/ Midrange/Treble cut or boost

• Time alignment (Digital program mate-rial in extreme cases can be as much as8 seconds behind the analogue). Thiswill noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on thebroadcaster's equipment settings and donot indicate a fault in the vehicle's radioreceiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,when driving through areas with weak HD sig-nals (fringe areas), you may experience that theradio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If thishappens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.To do so:


Audio system

04

140

1. Be sure the audio system is switched onand in AM or FM mode.

2. Press MENU in the center console controlpanel.

3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis-appear from the box on the display screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receivedigital broadcasts but it will continue to func-tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FMreceiver. Please note that when HD is switchedoff, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-nels (see the following section for a moredetailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD(an X will appear in the box on the displayscreen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FMwavebands only) will also have sub-channelsoffering additional types of programming ormusic.

In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayedto the left of the frequency number and a num-ber will be displayed to the right of the fre-quency number indicating that the currentlytuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.The "2" in the illustration indicates that you arecurrently listening to the first sub-channel onfrequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), pressthe right arrow key on the center console or onthe steering wheel keypad. To go back to themain channel, press the left arrow key. To goto subchannel 2 (if available), press the rightarrow key.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's mainchannel, pressing the left arrow key will tune tothe next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

• When the radio has gone into HD mode,it may take several seconds before the">" symbol (if the current frequency hasany sub-channels) is displayed to theright of the frequency. Pressing thearrow keys before the number is dis-played will cause the radio to tune to thenext available radio station, not to thecurrent station's sub-channels.

• When you are no longer in broadcastingrange of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-played. The radio will then be mutedand it will be necessary to tune to orsearch for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,see page 135 for information on storing sta-tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, itmay take up to 6 seconds before the channelbecomes audible. If you press this button whileyou are out of digital range of the transmitter,No HD reception will be displayed.


Audio system

04

��


Sirius satellite radio*

Listening to satellite radio

The Sirius satellite system consists of a numberof high elevation satellites in geosynchronousorbit.

NOTE

• The digital signals from the Sirius satel-lites are line-of-sight, which means thatphysical obstructions such as bridges,tunnels, etc, may temporarily interferewith signal reception.

• Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-lic objects transported on roof racks orin a ski box, or other antennas that mayimpede signals from the SIRIUS satel-lites.

Selecting Sirius radio mode

1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-tem (see page 134 and see page 135 forinformation on the standard audio andradio functions).

2. Press the MODE button repeatedly untilSirius 1 or 2 is displayed.

Activating Sirius radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has noaudio, which means that the channel isunsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539-

SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed (seealso "Selecting a channel".

2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).

3. When asked for the Sirius ID number pressAUTO to display this number. It is alsopossible to retrieve the Sirius ID from themenu.

4. UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION will be dis-played while the subscription is beingupdated, after which the display will returnto the normal view.

SIRIUS ID

The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting theSirius Call Center. It is used to activate youraccount and when making any account trans-actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referredto as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).

Selecting a channel category

1. Select Sirius radio mode as describedabove.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scrollthrough the list of categories.

4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key toselect a category.> The first channel in the selected cate-

gory will then be played.

NOTE

• The category ALL is default, which ena-bles you to scroll through the entire listof available satellite channels.

• The channel categories are automati-cally updated several times a year. Thistakes approximately two minutes andwill interrupt normal broadcasting. Amessage will be displayed while updat-ing is in progress. Information on chan-nel or feature updates is available atwww.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

• Using the left and right arrow keys

• By turning the tuning control

• Through direct channel entry.

NOTE

• The numbers of skipped or lockedchannels will not be displayed.

• If a channel is locked, the access codemust be entered before the channel canbe selected. See "Unlocking a channel"on page 143.


Audio system

04

142

Direct channel entry

The Sirius satellite channels are in numericalorder throughout all of the categories. Toaccess a channel directly:

1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel

entry.

2. Use the numerical keypad to enter thechannel's number.

3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to thischannel, even if it belongs to a categoryother than the currently selected one.

Scanning

SCAN automatically searches through the listof satellite channels. The search will only becarried out in the selected category, seepage 135 for more detailed information.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, seepage 135 for detailed information on storingchannels.

• A long press on one of the number keysstores the currently tuned channel on thatkey.

• A short press on a number key while theradio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to thepreset satellite channel stored on that but-ton, regardless of the currently selectedchannel category.

Song Seek and Song Memory

The Song Seek and Song Memory functionsprovide both audio and visual notification whenSirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.Song Seek enables you to store the name ofthe song for future advance notification whenthat song is being played. The Song Memory

feature makes it possible to view all of the cur-rent songs that are stored in memory.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system'smemory.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Add song to song mem. andfollow the instructions shown in the dis-play.

If a new song is selected when the memory isfull, you will be prompted to press ENTER todelete the last song on the list.

NOTE

The remaining songs in the list will movedown one position, and the newly addedsong will be placed at the top of the list.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of thesongs stored in the song memory, the listener

will be alerted by a text message and an audi-ble signal.

Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT tocancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press MENU

2. Scroll to Song seek

3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate thefunction.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio willremain tuned to the channel on which thesong was played.

Radio text

The text that is displayed about the song thatis currently playing can be changed. Use theAUTO button or the menu to display the Artist,Title, Composer, or switch radio text off.


Audio system

04

��

143

Advanced settings

This menu function enables you to make set-tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.To access this menu:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to the Sirius menu.

3. Select Advanced Sirius settings.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicleis at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-ius menu:

• The list of saved songs can be displayed

• Channel skip settings can be made

• Channel lock settings can be made

• The channel access code can be displayedor changed

• Your Sirius ID can be displayed

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel fromthe list of available channels.

Skipping a channel

1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and pressENTER.

2. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

3. Skip channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER or right arrow key.

Unskip all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe skip list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unskip all ch.

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the skip list and will againbe skipped the next time the ignition isswitched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted(locked). A locked channel will not provideaudio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked.

Locking a channel:

1. Select Sirius ID in the menu and selectLOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and pressENTER

3. Enter the channel access code7 and pressENTER.

4. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

5. Lock channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER or right arrow.

The channel is now locked and a checked boxwill be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-essary to enter the channel access code7 inorder to listen to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code7 is required to unlocka channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe locked list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unlock all ch.

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the locked list and will

7 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."


Audio system

04


again be locked the next time the ignition isswitched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change thechannel access code. The default code is0000.

To change the code:

1. Select CHANGE CODE and pressENTER.

2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.

3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.

4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.

If an incorrect code is entered, the textWRONG CODE! is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code:

1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Sirius settingsmenu and press ENTER.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for2 seconds.

3. The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you withassistance.

SIRIUS ID

This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti-vation ID.

CD functions

Center console, controls for CD functions

CD insert and eject

CD slot

Navigation button for changing CD tracks

Fast-back and change CD track

CD changer* position selection

Scan CD

Playing a CD (CD player8)

If a music CD is in the player when CD ispressed, it will be played automatically. Other-wise, insert a disc and press CD.

Playing a CD (CD changer)

If a CD position with a music CD is alreadyselected when CD is pressed, it will be playedautomatically. Otherwise select a disc with thenumber buttons 1 – 6 or / on the naviga-tion button.

Insert a CD (CD changer)

1. Select an empty position with the numberbuttons 1 – 6 or / on the navigationbutton.> An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that anew disc can be inserted. The CDchanger can hold up to six CDs.

2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.

Disc eject

For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected CDmust be removed within 12 seconds or it willbe automatically drawn back into the slot andthe CD player will enter pause mode. Press theCD button to restart the disc.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-ton.

Eject all discs with a long press on the ejectbutton. The entire magazine is emptied disc bydisc.

8 Certain markets only.


Audio system

04

��

145

NOTE

The Eject all function can only be used whilethe vehicle is at a standstill and will be can-celled if the vehicle begins to move.

Pause

When the audio system volume is turned offcompletely, the CD player will pause and willresume playing when the volume is turned upagain.

Sound files

In addition to playing normal music CDs, theCD player/changer can also play discs con-taining files in mp3 or wma format.

NOTE

Some copy protected sound files may notbe read by the player.

When a CD containing sound files is insertedinto the player the disc's directory structure isscanned before the CD begins playing. Thelength of time that this takes depends on thequality of the disc.

Navigating the disc and playing tracks

If a disc containing sound files is inside the CDplayer, press ENTER to display the disc'sdirectory structure. The directory structure isnavigated in the same way as the audio sys-

tem's menu structure. Sound files have the symbol and directories have the

symbol. Press ENTER to play a selected folderor a file.

When the music file has been played, theplayer will continue to play the rest of the filesin the current folder. When all of the files in thefolder have been played, the player will auto-matically go to the next folder and play the filesin it.

Fast-forward/change CD tracks and

sound files

Short presses / on the navigation buttonare used to scroll between CD tracks/soundfiles. Long presses are used to search withinCD tracks/sound files. TUNING (or the steeringwheel keypad) can also be used for this pur-pose.

Scan CD

This function plays the first ten seconds ofeach CD track/sound file. Press SCAN to acti-vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continueplaying the current CD track/sound file.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order(shuffle). The random CD tracks/sound filescan be scrolled through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between randomCD tracks on the current disc.

Different messages are displayed dependingon which random function has been selected:

• RANDOM means that the tracks from onlyone music CD are played

• RND ALL means that all tracks on allmusic CDs in the optional CD changer areplayed.

• RANDOM FOLDER means that the soundfiles in a directory on the current CD areplayed.

CD player

If a normal music CD is being played, activate/deactivate under Random.

If a disc with sound files is being played, acti-vate/deactivate under Random Folder.

CD changer

If a normal music CD is being played underRandom Single disc or Random All

discs. The All discs feature only applies to themusic CDs in the changer.

If a CD with sound files is being played, acti-vate/deactivate instead under Random

Folder. If you select another CD the function isdeactivated.


Audio system

04

146

Disc text

If title information is stored on a music CD it canbe shown on the display9. Activate/deactivatein CD mode under CD settings Disc text.

9 Only applies to the CD changer.


Bluetooth® hands-free connection

04

��

147

Introduction

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone


Center console control panel and display

Bluetooth® hands-free

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-less connection between a Bluetooth -ena-bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system.This enables the audio system to function as ahands-free connection and allows you toremote-control a number of the phone’s func-tions. The microphone used by this system islocated in the ceiling console (2). The buttons

and other controls on the cell phone canalways be used regardless of whether or notthe phone is connected to the hands-free sys-tem.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible withthe hands-free system. A list of compatiblephones is available at your Volvo retailer orat www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or anyother device in your vehicle in a way thatdistracts you from the task of driving safely.Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Bluetooth® functions in the centerconsole control panel

VOLUME – This function is also availableon the steering wheel keypad.

Keys containing letters and numbers fordialing numbers, adding phone bookentries, etc.

PHONE – Press to activate/deactivate theBluetooth® function

Navigation buttons

EXIT – Press to end or defer calls, erasecharacters that have been entered, end anongoing function. This function is alsoavailable on the steering wheel keypad.

ENTER – Answer a call. Press once to dis-play the most recently dialed number. This



04

148

function is also available on the steeringwheel keypad.

Getting started

Use the controls on steering wheel keypad (3)and in the center console (4) to access, navi-gate and make selections in the hands-freesystem’s menus (see page 152).


A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-ter console activates the hands-free system.The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top ofthe display to indicate that the audio system isin telephone mode.

The symbol indicates that the hands-freesystem is active.

A long press on the PHONE button deactivatesthe hands-free system and disconnects thecell phone.

Connecting cell phones

The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-ies, depending on the phone itself, and onwhether or not the phone has been previouslyconnected.

If this is the first time the phone is to be con-nected to the hands-free system, proceed asfollows:

Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func-tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual ifnecessary) or go to www.volvocars.com

2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands-free system by briefly pressing thePHONE button.> Add phone will be displayed. If one or

more cell phones are already registeredin the system, they will also be dis-played.

3. Select Add phone.> The audio system will search for cell

phones that are in range. This searchtakes approximately 30 seconds. Anyphones detected will be displayed withtheir Bluetooth® names. The hands-freesystem’s Bluetooth® name will appearin the cell phone’s display as My Car.

4. Select one of the cell phones shown in theaudio system’s (center console) display.

5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter thedigits shown in the audio system’s display.

Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus

1. Activate the hands-free system by brieflypressing the PHONE button in the centerconsole. If there is a cell phone connected,

disconnect it from the hands-free system(by pressing PHONE in the center consolefor several seconds).

2. Perform a search using the cell phone’sBluetooth® function (consult the cellphone’s owner’s manual if necessary).

3. Select My Car in the list of devices shownin the cell phone’s display.

4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234in the cell phone.

5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.

The cell phone will be registered and will beconnected automatically to the audio systemwhile the text Synchronising is displayed. Formore information on synchronizing a cellphone, see page 150.

When a connection has been established, the symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth®

name will be displayed. The cell phone cannow be controlled from the audio system.

Making a call

1. Ensure that TELEPHONE is shown at thetop of the center console display and thatthe symbol is visible (by pressing brieflyon PHONE on the center console).

2. Dial the desired phone number or use thephone book (see page 150).



04

��

149

3. Press ENTER.

End the call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnectedfrom the audio system if it is moved out ofrange. For more information about connec-tions, see page 148.

The cell phone can be manually disconnectedfrom the hands-free system by pressingPHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-tivated when the ignition is switched off (or ifthe driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip-ped with the optional keyless drive).

When the cell phone is disconnected from thehands-free system, a call in progress can becontinued using the cell phone’s own speakerand microphone.

NOTE

Certain cell phones may require confirma-tion from the phone’s keypad when a call istransferred from hands-free to the cellphone.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

� Press ENTER to answer a call, even if theaudio system is currently in e.g., CD or FMmode.

� Press EXIT to defer a call.

Automatic answer

This function means that incoming calls will beanswered automatically. Activate or deactivatethe function in the menu system under Phone

settings Call options Automatic

answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press MENU orENTER on the center console to access thefollowing functions:

• Microphone off–mute the audio system’smicrophone.

• Transfer call to mobile–transfer the callfrom hands-free to the cell phone.

• Phone book–this feature enables you tosearch for a stored telephone number.

NOTE

• On certain cell phones, the connectionis broken when the mute function isused, which is normal. If this happens,the hands-free system will prompt youto reconnect.

• A new call cannot be initiated whileanother call is in progress.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted when the hands-free system is activated. Use the buttons in thesteering wheel keypad or the audio system’svolume control.

Audio system volume

While a phone call is in progress, volume forthe audio system can be adjusted in the normalway with the audio system's volume control. Inorder to adjust volume during a phone call, theaudio system must be switched to one of theother modes (FM, CD, etc).

Audio system sound can be automaticallymuted when a phone call is received in Phone

settings Sounds and volume Mute

radio and adjust the volume with the / keys on the center console.



04

150

Ringing volume

Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust the volume withthe / keys on the center console.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringingtones can be selected in Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signal Ring

signal 1,2,3....

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone is notswitched off when one of the hands-freesystem's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’sring tone1, go to Phone settings Sounds

and volume Ring signal Use mobile

phone signal

More information about registeringand connecting cell phones

A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registeredin the hands-free system. Registration onlyneeds to be done once for each phone. Afterregistration, the cell phone no longer needs tobe in sight or searchable. Only one cell phonecan be connected to hands-free at a time.Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth

Remove telephone

Automatic connection

When the hands-free system is active and themost recently connected cell phone is withinrange, it is detected automatically. When theaudio system searches for the most recentlyconnected phone, this phone’s name appearsin the display. To manually connect a differentcell phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

To connect a phone other than the one thatwas most recently connected or to switchbetween cell phones that are already regis-tered in the hands-free system:

1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.2. Press PHONE in the center console and

select one of the phones on the list.

A connection can also be established in themenu system under Bluetooth Connect

phone or Change phone.

Phone book

In order to use the hands-free system’s phonebook (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must bedisplayed at the top of the center console dis-play and the symbol must be visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook of each registered cell phone. The phonebook is automatically copied each time aphone is connected. This function can be acti-vated in Phone settings Synchronise

phone book. Searches for contacts are onlymade in the phone book of the currently con-nected cell phone.

NOTE

If a particular cell phone does not supportcopying of the phone book, List is emptywill be displayed when copying has beencompleted.

If the phone book contains information aboutsomeone who is trying to call you, this infor-mation will be shown in the display.

1 Not supported by all cell phones.



04

��

151

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search for a contact in thephone book is to press and hold any of thebuttons 2–9 (see the illustration on page 147).This starts a search based on the first letter onthe button that has been pressed.

The phone book can also be accessed bypressing the navigation buttons / on thecenter console or by pressing / on thesteering wheel keypad. A search can also bemade in the phone book’s search menu inPhone book Search:

1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s nameand press ENTER or simply press ENTER.

2. Select the desired contact and pressENTER to make a call to that person.

Voice control

If the cell phone that is currently connectedallows calls to be made via voice commands,this function can be used by pressing and hold-ing ENTER.

Voice mail number

The phone number to your voice mail can bechanged in the menu Phone settings Call

options Voice mail number. If no numberhas been stored, this menu can be accessedby a prolonged press on button 1. Once a

phone number has been stored, press andhold 1 to dial this number.

Call lists

Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop-ied to the hands-free system each time thatphone is connected. These lists are then upda-ted while the phone is connected. PressENTER to show the most recently dialed num-bers. Other call lists can be found under Call

register.

NOTE

Certain cell phones display the list of themost recently dialed numbers in reverseorder.

Entering text

Text is entered by using the number buttons inthe center console. Press a button once toenter the first letter on the button, twice to enterthe second letter, etc. Continue to press thebutton to display other characters.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Pressand hold EXIT to erase all of the characters thathave been entered. Use the / buttons onthe center console to navigate among the char-acters.

Button Function

Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç

D E F 3 È É

G H I 4 Ì

J K L 5

M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø

P Q R S 7 ß

T U V 8 Ü Ù

W X Y Z 9

Press briefly if two characters areto be entered in succession fromthe same button.

+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %

Shift between uppercase andlowercase letters



04

152

Bluetooth® menus

1. Missed calls

2. Received calls

3 Dialed calls

4. Phone book

4.1. Search

4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

5. Bluetooth...

5.1. Change phone

5.2. Connect phone

5.3. Disconnect phone

5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone

6. Phone settings

6.1. Call options

6.1.2. Automatic answer

6.1.3. Voice mail number

6.2. Sounds and volume

6.3. IDIS

6.4. Synchronize phone book


Trip computer

04

��

153

Introduction

G02

2909

Information display and controls

READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the tripcomputer menus)

RESET–resets certain functions

To scroll through trip computer information,move the thumb wheel up or down. Continueturning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, this message mustbe acknowledged in order to return to thetrip computer function. Acknowledge amessage by pressing READ.

To change the unit of measure specified fordistance and speed, contact an authorizedVolvo workshop.

Average speed

The system calculates the average speed fromthe last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-taneous conversion of the car's current speedfrom km/h to mph.

Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-taneous conversion of the car's current speedfrom mph to km/h.

Current fuel consumption

(Instantaneous)

Current fuel consumption is calculated everysecond. The information on the display is

updated every few seconds. When the vehicleis stationary, "----" appears on the display.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption since the lastreset. Reset using RESET.

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

This function shows the approximate distancethat can be driven on the fuel remaining in thetank. The calculation is based on average fuelconsumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)of driving and the amount of fuel remaining inthe tank when the reading was taken. When themessage ---- miles to empty tank appears inthe display, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

The actual distance that can be driven onthe usable fuel remaining in the tank may beinfluenced by a change in driving style.

See also page 196 for information on drivingeconomically.

Resetting

1. Select Average speed or Average fuel

consumption.

2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 sec-ond to reset the selected function. IfRESET is kept depressed for at 3 three


Trip computer

04

154

seconds, Average speed and Average fuelconsumption are reset simultaneously.


Compass

04

155

Operation

G02

9737

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rearview mirror has an integrated displaythat shows the compass direction in which thevehicle is pointing. Eight different directions areshown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE

(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically whenthe vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. Toswitch the compass on/off use a pen or similarobject and press in the button on the rear sideof the mirror.

Calibration

The compass may need to be calibrated if, forexample, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-

netic zone. The character C is shown in themirror's display if calibration is necessary.

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safelyout of traffic and away from steel structuresand high-tension electrical wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

For best results from calibration, switch offall electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli-mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys-tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors areclosed.

3. Using a pen or similar object, press andhold the button on the rear side of mirroruntil C is shown again in the mirror(afterapprox. 6 seconds).

4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis-play when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method:

Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of nomore than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap-pears from the display when calibration iscomplete.

Selecting a magnetic zone

15

14

13

12

119

8

76

5

4

3

2

1

10

G01

8632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The correct zone must be selected for the com-pass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press andhold the button on the rear side of mirrorfor at least 3 seconds. The number for thecurrent area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-ber for the required geographic area(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-pass direction after several seconds.


Stability system

04

156

Introduction

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Controlsystem (DSTC) consists of a number of func-tions designed help reduce wheel spin, coun-teract skidding, and to generally help improvedirectional stability.

CAUTION

A pulsating sound will be audible when thesystem is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheelspin by transferring power from a drive wheelthat begins to lose traction to the wheel on theopposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-ity, for example when cornering, by brakingone or more of the wheels if the vehicle showsa tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to helpprevent the drive wheels from spinning whilethe vehicle is accelerating.

Under certain circumstances, such as whendriving with snow chains, or driving in deepsnow or loose sand, it may be advisable totemporarily switch off this function for maxi-mum tractive force.

WARNING

The car's handling and stability characteris-tics will be altered if the spin control functionhas been disabled.

Operation

G02

1409

Temporarily switching off Spin control

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC

menu is shown.

2. Hold down the RESET button to togglebetween DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or

OFF.

Messages in the information display

DSTC Temporarily OFF – system functionhas been temporarily reduced due to highbrake disc temperature. The function is acti-vated automatically when the brakes havecooled.

DSTC Service required – the system hasbeen disabled due to a fault. If this occurs:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn offthe engine.


If the message remains when the engine isrestarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-shop to have the system inspected.

Symbols in the instrument panel

If the symbols and are displayedat the same time, read the message in theinformation display.

If the symbol appears alone, it mayappear as follows:


Stability system

04

157

• If the symbol flashes, this indicates that thestability system is actively functioning tohelp counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

• If the symbol remains on for approximately2 seconds after the engine has beenstarted, this indicates that the system isperforming a self-diagnostic test.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to helpimprove driving safety. It supplements, butcan never replace, the driver's judgmentand responsibility when operating the vehi-cle. Speed and driving style should alwaysbe adapted to traffic and road conditions.


Active chassis system–Four C

04


Active chassis (Four C)*

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha-racteristics of the shock absorbers so that thecar's driving characteristics can be adjusted.There are three settings: Comfort, Sport andAdvanced.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer rideand the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.This mode is particularly suitable for long-dis-tance highway driving. The indicator light in thebutton will be on when this mode is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway isreduced during cornering and steeringresponse is more immediate. The transmissionshifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. Theindicator light in the button will be on to indi-cate that Sport mode has been selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimaland steering response is very direct. Gear shift-ing is done at high rpm in each gear fordynamic and active driving.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console tochange setting. The setting in use when theengine is switched off is activated the next timethe engine is started.

Speed-dependent steering force*

Steering force increases with the speed of thevehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer inorder to facilitate parking, etc.

Steering force can be changed under Car

settings Steering force level. For adescription of the menu system, seepage 122.

NOTE

This steering force level menu function can-not be accessed when the vehicle is inmotion.


Cruise control

04

��

159

Operation

G02

2910

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed indicator (parentheses indicatestandby mode)

Engaging the cruise control function

Before a speed can be set, the cruise controlsystem must be engaged (put in standbymode).

� Press the CRUISE button (1).

> The symbol illuminates and the text(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur-rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis-play.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged atspeeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increasedor decreased by using the or buttons.

1. Press and hold down or until thevehicle reaches the desired speed.> This will become the set speed when the

button is released.

2. Press or for approximately a halfsecond and release the button to increaseor decrease vehicle speed by approxi-mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

• A temporary increase in speed bypressing the accelerator pedal, for lessthan 1 minute (e.g. when passinganother car), does not affect the currentcruise control setting. The vehicle willautomatically return to the previouslyset speed when the accelerator pedal isreleased.

• If one of the cruise control buttons iskept depressed for more than approx.1 minute cruise control is disengaged.The engine must then be switched off inorder to reset cruise control.

Automatic deactivation

Cruise control is automatically deactivatedtemporarily if one of the following occurs:

• If the speed drops below approximately20 mph (30 km/h).

• When the brake pedal is depressed.

• If the gear selector is moved to position N.

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

• If the vehicle's speed is increased by usingthe accelerator pedal for more than1 minute.

The currently set speed will be saved in thesystem's memory.


Cruise control

04

160

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate cruisecontrol by pressing 0. The saved speed isshown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . Thevehicle's speed returns to the most recently setspeed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speedafter the button has been pressed.

Deactivation

Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE, byputting the gear selector in Neutral, or byswitching off the engine. The set speed iscleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavytraffic or when driving on wet or slipperyroads. Cruise control may not maintain setspeed on steep downgrades.


Collision warning with Auto-brake*

04

��


Introduction

Collision Warning with Auto-brake is designedto assist the driver if there is a risk of a collisionwith the vehicle ahead, if that vehicle is at astandstill or moving in the same direction asyour vehicle. Auto-brake helps reduce the col-lision speed.

Collision Warning consists of the followingthree functions:

• Collision warning warns the driver of theimminent risk of a collision.

• Brake support helpsthe driver brake effi-ciently in a critical situation.

• Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-cally if a collision cannot be avoided.

WARNING

The auto-brake function cannot prevent acollision but instead is intended to reducespeed at the moment of impact. For fullbraking effect, driver must apply the brakes.

WARNING

• The collision warning system does notwork in all driving situations, and traffic,weather and road conditions.

• The collision warning system is notdesigned to detect pedestrians.

• Warnings are only provided when therisk of collision is high. The Functionsection provides information about lim-itations that the driver must be aware ofbefore use.

• Never wait for a collision warning. Thissystem is designed to be a supplemen-tary driving aid. It is not, however,intended to replace the driver's atten-tion and judgement. The driver isresponsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance and speed, even when the colli-sion warning system is in use.

• Maintenance of the collision warningsystem components must only be per-formed by a trained and qualified Volvotechnician.

Function

G017382

Function overview

Visual warning signal, collision risk

Radar sensor

Camera

Collision warning

The radar sensor and the camera worktogether to detect stationary vehicles and vehi-cles that are moving in the same direction asyour vehicle. If there is a risk of collision, thedriver is alerted by a flashing red warning lightand an audible warning signal. Collision warn-ing is active at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h).

Brake support

If the risk of collision continues to increase afterthe collision warning has been given, brake



04


support is activated. Brake support preparesthe brake system to react quickly, and thebrakes are applied slightly. This may be expe-rienced as a light tug.

If the brakes are applied quickly, full brakingeffect will be provided, even if pressure on thebrake pedal is light.

Auto-brake

If a collision is imminent and the driver has notapplied the brakes, the auto-brake function isactivated without the driver pressing the brakepedal. Limited brake force is applied to reducethe vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs.

WARNING

The auto-brake function cannot prevent acollision but instead is intended to reducespeed at the moment of impact. For fullbraking effect, driver must apply the brakes.

NOTE

The auto-brake function is always on andcannot be turned off.

Operation

Some settings are controlled from the centerconsole via a menu system. For information onhow the menu system is used, see page 122.

On and off

To switch Collision Warning on or off, go intothe menu Car settings Collision warning

settings and select On or Off. When the engineis started, the setting that was selected whenit was switched off will be used.

Activating/deactivating warning signals

The collision warning system’s audible and vis-ual signals are activated automatically whenthe engine is started if the collision warningsystem is activated.

The audible warning signal can be activated/deactivated by selecting the alternative On orOff in Car settings Collision warning

settings Warning sound.

Setting a warning distance

This setting determines the distance at whichthe visual and audible warnings are triggered.Select Long, Normal or Short under Car

settings Collision warning settings

Warning distance

The warning distance determines the level ofsensitivity used by the system. The warningdistance Long provides an earlier warning.Begin by using Long and if the system givestoo many warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

• The setting Short should only be usedin situations where traffic is light andmoving at low speeds.

• Collision Warning alerts the driver to therisk of a collision but this function can-not reduce the driver’s reaction time.

• For Collision Warning to be as effectiveas possible, it is recommended that Dis-tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, seepage 174.

NOTE

• When adaptive cruise control is used,the warning light and signal will be usedby cruise control, even if they have beendeactivated by the driver.

• In situations where traffic is moving atconsiderably different speeds, or if thevehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-ings may be considered to be late, evenif the setting Long has been selected.

Checking settings

The current Collision Warning settings can bechecked by going into the menu system at Car

settings Collision warning settings. Seepage 122 for more information on the menusystem.



04

��


Limitations

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver isnot looking straight ahead may make the visualwarning signal in the windshield difficult to see.For this reason, always activate the audiblewarning signal in such conditions.

NOTE

The visual warning signal may be temporar-ily disengaged in the event of high passen-ger compartment temperature due to strongsunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audiblewarning signal will be used, even if it hasbeen deactivated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the distance to thevehicle ahead is very small or if steering wheeland pedal movements are great, for example,due to a very active driving style.

WARNING

• In certain situations, the system cannotprovide warnings or warning may bedelayed if traffic conditions or otherexternal factors make it impossible forthe radar sensor or camera to detect thevehicle ahead.

• Warnings may not be provided if thedistance to the vehicle ahead is short,or if movements of the steering wheel/brake pedal are great, such as duringactive driving.

• The sensor system has a limited rangefor stationary or slow-moving vehiclesand may therefore give delayed or nowarnings if your vehicle’s speed isabove approximately 45 mph(70 km/h).

• Warnings for stationary or slow-movingvehicles may not be provided in darkconditions.

The Collision Warning system uses the sameradar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. Formore information on the radar sensor and itslimitations, see page 170.

If no warning is given, or if a warning is delayed,Auto-brake will also not be provided or will bedelayed.

NOTE

If warnings are given too frequently, thewarning distance can be reduced (seepage 162. This causes the system to pro-vide later warnings, which decreases thetotal number of warnings provided.

The camera’s limitations

The camera is used by Collision Warning withAuto-brake, Driver Alert Control (seepage 177), and Lane Departure Warning (seepage 180).

NOTE

• To help protect the camera in very hotconditions, it may be temporarilyswitched off for approximately 15minutes after the engine has beenstarted.

• Keep the section of the windshield infront of the camera clean and free of ice,snow, or condensation.



04


WARNING

• The camera has the same limitations asthe human eye. In other words, its“vision is impaired” by adverse weatherconditions such as heavy snowfall,dense fog, etc. These conditions mayreduce the function of systems thatdepend on the camera or cause thesesystems to temporarily stop function-ing.

• Never place any objects, decals, etc.,on the windshield in front of the camera.This could reduce or block the camera’sfunction, and could cause one or moreof the systems that utilize the camera tostop functioning.

• Strong sunlight, reflections from theroad surface, ice or snow covering theroad, a dirty road surface, or unclearlane marker lines may drastically reducethe camera’s capacity to detect the sideof a lane or another vehicle.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windshield sensors

blocked is displayed, this means that the cam-era is obscured and cannot detect vehicle orroad marker lines in front of the vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Collision Warning withAuto-brake, Lane Departure Warning, andDriver Alert Control will not have full function-ality.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or coveredwith ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of thecamera.



04

��


Cause Action

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in thedisplay.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to registervisibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have thissurface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Collision warn.

OFF

Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis-appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.

Collision warn.

Unavailable

Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activatethe function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.

Auto braking

was activated

Auto-braking has been active.

Camera blocked

See manual

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed bysnow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, seepage 163 for more information on the camera’s limitations.



04



Radar blocked

See manual

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, forexample by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect othervehicles, see page 170 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn.

Service required

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

04

��


Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optionalsystem designed to assist the driver by main-taining a set speed or a set distance to thevehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for useon long straight roads in steady traffic, such ason highways and other main roads.

WARNING

• Do not use the adaptive cruise controlsystem in demanding driving conditionssuch as city traffic, winding roads, atintersections, on slippery surfaces, inpoor visibility, heavy rain, etc.

• Maintenance of cruise control compo-nents must only be performed by anauthorized Volvo workshop.

WARNING

• Adaptive cruise control cannot cover alldriving situations and traffic, weatherand road conditions. The Function sec-tion provides information about limita-tions that the driver must be aware ofbefore using the adaptive cruise con-trol.

• This system is designed to be a supple-mentary driving aid. It is not, however,intended to replace the driver's atten-tion and judgement. The driver isresponsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance and speed and must intervene ifadaptive cruise control does not main-tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-tance.

Function

G02

1412

Function overview

Warning light, braking by driver required

Controls

Radar sensor in front grille

Adaptive cruise control consists of:

• A cruise control system to maintain a setspeed

• A system to maintain a set distance to thevehicle ahead (expressed as a time inter-val. For example, you can choose toremain approximately 2 seconds behindthe vehicle ahead).



04


WARNING

• Adaptive cruise control is not a collisionavoidance system. The driver is alwaysresponsible for applying the brakes ifthe system does not detect anothervehicle.

• Adaptive cruise control does not reactto slow moving or stationary vehicles.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the samelane) is measured by a radar sensor. Your vehi-cle's speed is regulated by acceleration andbraking. The brakes may emit a sound whenthey are being modulated by the adaptivecruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptivecruise control system modulates thebrakes. Do not rest your foot under thebrake pedal.

The adaptive cruise control system is designedto follow the vehicle ahead of you in the samelane, at a set time interval.

If the radar sensor has not detected a vehicleahead, the system will then attempt to maintainthe set speed. This is also the case if the speed

of the vehicle ahead exceeds the speed thatyou have set.

The adaptive cruise control system is designedto smoothly regulate speed. However, thedriver must apply the brakes in situations thatrequire immediate braking. This applies whenthere are great differences in speed betweenvehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes sud-denly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak-ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all,see page 170.

Adaptive cruise control can only be activatedat speeds above 20mph (30 km/h). If speedfalls below 20 mph (30 km/h) or if engine speed(rpm) becomes too low, adaptive cruise controldisengages and will no longer modulate thebrakes. In situations when adaptive cruise con-trol cannot be activated Cruise Control

Unavailable is shown in the display, seepage 172.

WARNING

When adaptive cruise control disengages,the brakes will not be modulated automati-cally. The driver must assume full controlover the vehicle.

Warning light-driver braking required

Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacitythat is equivalent to approximately 30% of thevehicle's total braking capacity. In situationsrequiring more brake force than ACC can pro-vide, if the driver does not apply the brakes, anaudible signal will sound and a red warninglight will illuminate in the windshield to alert thedriver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme lightcontrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead maymake the visual warning signal in the wind-shield difficult to see.

WARNING

Cruise control only warns of vehiclesdetected by the radar sensor, seepage 170. In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may be delayed. Thedriver should always apply the brakes whennecessary.



04

��


Operation

Controls and display

Activate and resume settings, increasespeed

Standby mode, on/off

Set time interval

Activate and set a speed

Set speed (parentheses indicate standbymode)

Time interval while it is being set

Time interval after it has been set

Engaging the cruise control function

Before ACC can be used, it must first be put instandby mode. To do so, press . The symbol

illuminates in the display and (---) indicatethat ACC is in standby mode.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons to store (set) thevehicle's current speed. The set speed, forexample 55 mph, is shown in the display.

NOTE

Adaptive cruise control cannot be engagedat speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

The “car” symbol illuminateson the left side of the displaywhen the radar sensordetects another vehicleahead. The distance to a vehi-cle ahead is only regulatedwhen this symbol is illumi-

nated.

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increasedor decreased by using the or buttons.

When the system is in active mode, the but-ton has the same function as , but results ina smaller increase in speed.

NOTE

• If one of the adaptive cruise control but-tons is pressed for more than approxi-mately one minute, ACC will be deacti-vated. The engine must then beswitched off and restarted to reset ACC.

• In some situations cruise control cannotbe activated. Cruise Control

Unavailable is shown in the display,see page 172.

Setting a time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead isincreased with and decreased with . Thecurrent time interval is shown briefly in the dis-play following adjustment.

Five different time intervalscan be selected and areshown in the display as 1–5horizontal bars. The greaterthe number of bars, the longerthe time interval. At lowspeeds, when the distance to

the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases thetime interval slightly. In order to follow the vehi-cle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allowsthe time interval to vary considerably in certainsituations.



04


WARNING

• Only use a time interval that is suitablein current traffic conditions.

• A short time interval gives the driver lim-ited reaction time if an unexpected sit-uation occurs in traffic.

The number of bars indicating the selectedtime interval are shown while the setting isbeing made and for several seconds afterward.A smaller version of the symbol is then shownto the right in the display. The same symbol isalso displayed when Distance Alert is acti-vated, see page 174 .

Deactivating and resuming settings

Cruise control is deactivated, either with ashort press on , or by action taken by thedriver, such as braking, etc. The set speed, forexample 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe-ses. Speed and time interval are resumed bypressing .

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speedafter the button has been pressed.

A short press on in standby mode or a longpress in active mode deactivates cruise con-

trol. The set speed is then cleared and cannotbe resumed.

When ACC is activated, the vehicle’s speedincreases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h)each additional time is pressed.

Deactivation due to action by the driver

ACC is deactivated:

• when the brakes are applied

• if the gear selector is moved to N

• if the accelerator pedal is depressed for anextended period.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed fora short time, such as when passing anothervehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily andis reactivated when the pedal is released.

Automatic deactivation

Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys-tems such as ABS, the stability and tractioncontrol system (DSTC), and the Distance AlertSystem. If any of these systems are not func-tioning properly, adaptive cruise control isautomatically deactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signalwill sound and the message Cruise Control

Canceled is shown in the display. The driver

must then intervene and adapt the vehicle'sspeed to the surrounding traffic.

Automatic deactivation may be caused if:

• the vehicle's speed falls below 20 mph(30 km/h)

• the wheels lose traction or if the anti-lockbrake system (ABS) is activated

• brake temperature is high

• engine speed (rpm) is too low

• the radar sensor is obstructed by, forexample, wet snow or rain.

The radar sensor and its limitations

The radar sensor is used by both AdaptiveCruise Control and the Collision Warning Sys-tem with Auto-brake. It is designed to detectcars or larger vehicles driving in the samedirection as your vehicle.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects, such as extraheadlights, must not be installed in front ofthe grille.

Modification of the radar sensor could makeits use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehiclesahead is impeded:



04

��


• if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-not detect other vehicles, for example inheavy rain, or if snow or other objects areobscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensorclean.

• if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-cantly different from your own speed.

WARNING

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.In some situations it may detect a vehiclelater than expected or not detect vehicles atall.

G02

1414

Radar sensor field of vision (gray)

In certain situations, the radar sensor can-not detect vehicles at close quarters, forexample a vehicle that suddenly enters the

lanes between your vehicle and the onethat the system has already detected.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, orvehicles not driving in the center of the lanemay remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect thewrong vehicle or lose a detected vehiclefrom view.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Radar blocked See manual isdisplayed, this means that the radar signalsfrom the sensor have been obstructed and thata vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of theACC, Distance Alert, and Collision WarningSystem with Auto-brake will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of theradar.



04


Cause Action

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere withthe radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affectthe function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect thatit is no longer obstructed.



- Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

- Turn on DSTC

to enable Cruise

ACC cannot be activated until the stability system (DSTC) has been activated. see page 156 for moreinformation on DSTC.

- Cruise control canceled ACC has been automatically switched off.

The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

- Cruise control unavailable ACC cannot be activated. This may be due to:

• high brake temperature

• the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)



04



Radar blocked

See manual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannotdetect other vehicles.

see page 170 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations..

Cruise control

Service required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.


Distance alert

04

174

Introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-trol and is a function that provides informationabout the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Time interval information is only given for avehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle, inthe same lane, and in the same direction. Noinformation is provided for vehicles drivingtoward you, moving very slowly, or at a stand-still.

G017362

A smaller section of the red warning light in thewindshield glows steadily if your vehicle iscloser to the vehicle ahead than the set timeinterval.

NOTE

Distance Alert is in active mode while Adap-tive Cruise Control is active.

Distance Alert is active at speeds aboveapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance tothe vehicle ahead. It does not affect thespeed of your vehicle.

Operation

� Press the button in the center instrumentpanel to switch this function on or off.> The indicator light in the button illumi-

nates when the function is on.

Setting a time interval

The buttons for setting a time interval arelocated on the left side of the steering wheel,see the illustration on page 169 .

� Press to increase the interval or todecrease it.

Five different time intervalscan be selected and areshown in the display as 1–5horizontal bars. The greaterthe number of bars, the longerthe time interval.

No. of bars Approx. time interval(in seconds)

1 1.0

2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2

5 2.6

The number of bars indicating the selectedtime interval are shown while the setting isbeing made and for several seconds afterward.A smaller version of the symbol is then shownto the right in the display. The same symbol is


Distance alert

04

��

175

also displayed when Adaptive Cruise Control isactivated.

NOTE

• The higher your vehicle’s speed, thegreater the distance to the vehicleahead, measured in feet (meters), for agiven time interval.

• The set time interval is also used byAdaptive Cruise Control, see page 169.

WARNING

Only use a time interval that is suitable incurrent traffic conditions.

Limitations

The Distance Alert function uses the sameradar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Controland the Collision Warning system. See page170 for more information on the radar sensor’slimitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme lightcontrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead maymake the visual warning signal in the wind-shield difficult to see.

WARNING

• Bad weather or winding roads mayaffect the radar sensor’s capacity todetect vehicles ahead.

• The size of the vehicle ahead, such as amotorcycle, may also make it difficult todetect. This may result in the warninglight illuminating at a shorter distancethan the one that has been set, or thatthe light will not come on at all.


- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.


Distance alert

04

176


Radar blocked

See manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way andcannot detect other vehicles. See page 170 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn.

Service required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto-brake is not functioning properly. Contact a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.


Driver Alert System*

04

��


Introduction

The Driver Alert System is designed to help adriver who may be becoming fatigued or whois inadvertently leaving the lane.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-ent functions that can be switched on togetheror separately.

• Driver Alert Control (DAC)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

When one or both of the functions has beenswitched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if speed goes under37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is dependenton the road/lane being clearly marked by pain-ted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert system does not function inall situations and is designed to be a sup-plementary aid. It is not, however, intendedto replace the driver’s attention and judge-ment.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)–generalinformation

G017332

This function is intended to alert the driver ifhis/her driving becomes erratic, such as if thedriver is distracted or fatigued.

NOTE

The camera has certain limitations, seepage 163.

A camera monitors the painted lines markingthe lane in which the vehicle is traveling andcompares the direction of the road with thedriver’s movements of the steering wheel. Thedriver is alerted if the vehicle does not followthe lane smoothly.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to beused on main roads and is not meant for use incity traffic.

WARNING

• DAC is not intended to extend the dura-tion of driving. Always plan breaks atregular intervals to help remain alert.

• In certain cases, fatigue may not affectthe driver’s behavior. In situations ofthis type, no warning will be provided.Therefore, it is important to take breaksat regular intervals, regardless ofwhether or not DAC has given a warn-ing.

Limitations

In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has notbecome erratic.

• if the driver is testing the LDW function

• in strong crosswinds

• on grooved road surfaces.



04


Operating DAC

Certain settings can be made from the menusystem controlled from the center instrumentpanel, see page 122 for more information onthe menu system.

The current system status can be checked onthe trip computer’s display by using the but-tons on the left steering wheel lever.

Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver

Alert is displayed. The second line showsthe alternative Off, Unavailable, or[-----], i.e., the number of bars.

READbutton. Confirms and erases a mes-sage in the display.

Activating DAC

In the center instrument panel, go to Car

settings Driver Alertand select On.

The function is activated when thevehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph(65 km/h). The display will show levelmarkings of 1–5 bars, where a low

number of bars indicates erratic driving. A highnumber of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, thedriver will be alerted by an audible signal andthe message Driver Alert, Time for a break isdisplayed. The warning will be repeated after ashort time if the driving pattern remains thesame.

WARNING

• An alert should be taken seriously sinceit is sometimes difficult for a driver torealize that he/she is fatigued.

• In the event of a warning or if the driverfeels fatigued, stop as soon as possiblein a safe place and rest.



04

��




- Driver Alert

OFF

The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert

Unavailable

The vehicle’s speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or the road lacks clear marking lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a lownumber of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert

Time for a break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Camera blocked

See manual

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the areaof the windshield in front of the camera. See page 163 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys

Service required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the messageremains in the display.



04


Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–general information

This function is designed to help reduce therisk of accidents in situations where the vehicleleaves its lane and there is a risk of driving offthe road or into the opposite lane. LDW con-sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s sidemarker lines. The driver is alerted by an audiblesignal if the vehicle crosses a side marker lineor the road’s center dividing line.

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing thebutton on the center console. A light in the but-ton illuminates when the function is on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Unavailable when the function is instandby mode.

When LDW is in standby mode, the function isactivated automatically after the camera hasmonitored the road’s side marker lines and thevehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h).Lane Depart Warn Available will be dis-played.

If the camera can no longer monitor the road’sside marker lines, or if the vehicle’s speed fallsbelow 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return tostandby mode and Lane Depart Warn

Unavailable will be displayed.

If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’sleft or right side marker lines, the driver will bealerted by an audible signal.

No warning signal will be given in the follow-ing situations:

• The turn signal is being used

• The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1

• The throttle pedal is pressed quickly

• If the steering wheel is moved quickly

• In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’sbody to sway.

See page 163 for information on the camera’slimitations.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for eachtime the wheels cross a marker line. Noalarm will be given if a marker line isbetween the wheels.

1 A warning will be given even when Increased sensitivity has been selected.



04




Lane departure

warning On/Off

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

- Lane Depart Warn

Available

The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart Warn

Unavailable

Speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or if the road lacks clear marker lines.

Camera blocked

See manual

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Cleanthe area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 163 for information on the camera’slimitations.

Driver Alert Sys

Service required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if themessage remains in the display.

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can bemade in the menu system under Car settings

Lane Departure Warning. See page 122for more information on the menu system.

On at startup: This selection puts the functionin standby mode each time the engine is

started. Otherwise, the system will be in themode that it was in when the engine wasswitched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will begiven at an earlier stage and fewer limitationsapply.


Park assist*

04


Introduction

The park assist system is designed to assistyou when driving into parking spaces, garages,etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors locatedin one or both bumpers to measure the dis-tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who maybe close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

This system is available in the rear bumperonly, or in both the front and rear bumpers.

Park assist utilizes four ultrasound sensors inthe bumper(s) to measure the distance to avehicle, object, or a person who may be closeto the front or rear of your vehicle. An audiblesignal and symbols in the audio system’s dis-play indicate the distance to the object

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT asafety system. This system is designed tobe a supplementary aid when parking thevehicle. It is not, however, intended toreplace the driver's attention and judge-ment.

Function

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-ton in the center console illuminates when thesystem is on.

• The front park assist system is active fromthe time the engine is started until the vehi-cle exceeds a speed of approximately10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when thevehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engineis running and reverse gear has beenselected.


The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started.

� Press the Park assist button on the centerconsole to temporarily deactivate the sys-tem(s).> The indicator light in the button will go

out when the system has been deacti-vated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivated thenext time the engine is started, or if the buttonis pressed (the indicator light in the button willilluminate).

NOTE

• Front park assist is disengaged auto-matically when the parking brake isapplied.

• If the vehicle is equipped with front andrear park assist, both systems will bedeactivated by pressing the button.


Park assist*

04

��


Signals from the park assist system

Active

Active

Active

1

2

3

Views in the display

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overviewof the vehicle’s position in relation to adetected object.

The markers in the display indicate that one ormore of the four sensors has detected anobject. The greater the number of markers, thecloser the vehicle is to the object.

Display in a vehicle with rear park assistonly. Here, an object has been detected byboth of the right rear sensors.

Display in a vehicle with both front and rearpark assist. The solid marker in this exampleindicates that an object is closer than approx-imately 1 foot (30 cm) to the right front sensor.

Display in a vehicle with both front and rearpark assist. Reverse gear is selected and noobjects have been detected in front of orbehind the vehicle.

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittenttone that pulses faster as you come close to anobject, and becomes constant when you arewithin approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an objectin front of or behind the vehicle (example 2 inthe illustration). If there are objects within thisdistance both behind and in front of the vehicle,the tone alternates between front and rearspeakers.

If the volume of another source from the audiosystem is high, this will be automatically low-ered.

Rear park assist

G02

1423

The distance monitored behind the vehicle isapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signalcomes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towinga trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mountedcarrier, etc, which could trigger the rear parkassist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuinetrailer wiring is used.


Park assist*

04


Front park assist

G02

1424

The distance monitored in front of the vehicleis approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-nal comes from the audio system's frontspeakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliaryheadlights and front park assist since theselights could trigger the system's sensors.

Faults in the system

If the information symbol illuminates and Park

Assist syst Service required is shown on theinformation display, this indicates that the sys-tem is not functioning properly and has beendisengaged. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assistsystem may give unexpected warning sig-nals that can be caused by external soundsources that use the same ultrasound fre-quencies as the system. This may includesuch things as the horns of other vehicles,wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This doesnot indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

Location of the front sensors.

G02

1425

Location of the rear sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and a suitable car washing deter-gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may causeincorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-ing signals from the park assist system.


Blind Spot Information System*

04

��


Introduction

G02

1426

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is aninformation system that indicates the presenceof another vehicle moving in the same directionas your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blindarea."

CAUTION

The BLIS system should only be repaired bya trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

WARNING

• BLIS is an information system, NOT awarning or safety system.

• BLIS does not eliminate the need foryou to visually confirm the conditionsaround you, and the need for you to turnyour head and shoulders to make surethat you can safely change lanes.

• As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech-nology. The cameras are located beneath theside-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras havedetected a vehicle in the blind area (up toapproximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side ofyour vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), seethe illustration, the indicator light in the doorpanel illuminates. The light will glow continu-ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in theblind area.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates onthe side of the vehicle where the system hasdetected another vehicle. If your vehicle ispassed on both sides at the same time, bothlights will illuminate.

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts thedriver if a fault should occur with the system.For example, if one or both of the system'scameras are obscured, a message (see thetable on page 188) will appear in the informa-tion display in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,the system can be temporarily switched off (forinstructions, see page 187).

G02

1427

Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.(3 meters)



04


When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle ismoving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass anothervehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed byanother vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

• BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

• BLIS does not function when your vehi-cle is backing up.

• If you are towing a wide trailer, this mayprevent the BLIS cameras from detect-ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-cles. The system is designed to help detectmotor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surroundingvehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, avehicle in the blind area must have its head-lights on. This means, for example, that thesystem will not detect a trailer without head-lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

• BLIS does not react to cyclists ormopeds.

• BLIS does not react to vehicles that arestanding still.

• The function of the BLIS cameras maybe affected by intense light, or whendriving at night in areas where there areno external sources of light (e.g., streetlights, other vehicles, etc.). In suchcases, the system may react as if thecameras were obscured.

• In both of the above mentioned condi-tions, a message will appear in the infor-mation display.

• When driving in such conditions, thesystem's function will be limited or itmay be temporarily switched off, seepage 187 for instructions.

• When the message is no longer dis-played, BLIS will return to normal func-tion.

• The BLIS cameras have the same limi-tation as the human eye. In other words,their "vision is impaired" by adverseweather conditions such as heavysnowfall, dense fog, etc.



04

��


Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)may illuminate even when there are no othervehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-sionally even when there are no other vehi-cles in the blind area, this does not indicatea fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) mayilluminate even when there are no other vehi-cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,smooth surface such as barriers between lanes ona highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is lowon the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS cameralenses must be kept clean. They can be wipedclean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

• Clean the lenses carefully to avoidscratching.

• The lenses are electrically heated tohelp melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on. The indicator lights willprovide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

• The system can be switched off by press-ing the BLIS button in the center console(see the illustration). The indicator light inthe button goes out when the system is



04


switched off, and a text message is dis-played.

• BLIS can be switched on again by pressingthe button. The indicator light in the buttonwill illuminate and a new text message willbe displayed. Press the READ button (seepage 124) to erase the message.

BLIS system messages

Text in the dis-play

System status

Blind spot syst.

service required

BLIS not functioningproperly. Contact anauthorized Volvoservice technician.

Blind spot syst.

camera blocked

BLIS cameraobscured. Clean thelenses.

Blind-spot info

system ON

BLIS system on

Text in the dis-play

System status

Blind-spot info

system off

BLIS system off

Blind spot syst.

reduced function

The BLIS cameras'function has beenreduced by e.g., fog,or strong sunlightdirectly into thecamea. The camerawill reset itself whenthese conditionshave changed.


Passenger compartment convenience

04

��

189

Storage spaces

G02

4158



04


Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of thefront seat cushions

Glove compartment

Storage compartment, 12-volt socket andAUX input

Jacket holder

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Jacket holder

The jacket hanger is located on the inboardside of the front passenger's seat headrestraint. It is only intended for hanging lightgarments.

Tunnel console

G02

1436

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) underarmrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-ger, 12 V socket and small storage com-partment.

Cigarette lighter and ashtray*

Your Volvo retailer has lighters and ashtraysavailable as accessories.

Glove compartment

The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere. There are also holders for pens and fuelcards. The glove compartment can be lockedmanually with the key blade, see page 63.



04

191

Vanity mirror

G02

1438

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when thecover is lifted.

12-volt sockets

G02

1439

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

G02

1440

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical socket can be used for 12-voltaccessories such as cell phone chargers andcoolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For the

socket to supply current, the ignition must bein at least mode I, see page 80.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when notin use.


Passenger compartment convenience–S80 Executive

04

192

Refrigerator

G02

1857

The refrigerator is located behind the rear cen-ter armrest and has a volume of 12.2 qts.(11.5 liters). It functions when the engine is run-ning or when the ignition is in mode II

WARNING

Bottles kept in the refrigerator should befirmly sealed and the refrigerator's doormust be securely closed while the vehicle isin motion.

NOTE

The refrigerator requires free air circulationin order to function at its best. At least2 inches (5 cm) of free space should be leftaround the refrigerator's air intake in thetrunk.

Carpet in the trunk

G02

1858

If the vehicle is equipped with a refrigerator, therear seat backrests must be folded downslightly before the carpet on the floor of thetrunk can be removed, see page 85.

Glasses

G02

1859

There is a storage compartment under thecover in the rear center armrest for two glassesand a bottle opener.

WARNING

Keep the glasses in their storage compart-ment when not in use or in the cup holdersprovided. The cover on the armrest shouldbe closed when the vehicle is in motion.


04

193

194

Driving recommendations..................................................................... 196Refueling............................................................................................... 200Loading................................................................................................. 204Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 207Emergency towing................................................................................ 209

05DURING YOUR TRIP

05 During your trip

Driving recommendations

05

196

General information

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Better driving economy may be obtained bythinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stopsand adjusting the speed of your vehicle toimmediate traffic conditions.

Observe the following rules:

• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-perature as soon as possible by drivingwith a light foot on the accelerator pedal forthe first few minutes of operation. A coldengine uses more fuel and is subject toincreased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehiclefor driving short distances. This does notallow the engine to reach normal operatingtemperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelerationand hard braking.

• Use the transmission's Drive (D) positionas often as possible and avoid using kick-down.

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extraload) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tirepressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snow orice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,increase air resistance and also fuel con-sumption.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-tion will be lower with the air conditioningon and the windows closed than with theair conditioning off and the windows open.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuelconsumption modes can help you learnhow to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

• Dirty air cleaner

• Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

• Dragging brakes

• Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and othersare checked at the standard maintenanceintervals.

WARNING

Driving with the trunk open: Driving withthe trunk open could lead to poisonousexhaust gases entering the passenger com-partment. If the trunk must be kept open forany reason, proceed as follows:

• Close the windows

• Set the ventilation system control to airflow to floor, windshield and side win-dows and the blower control to its high-est setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has atendency to understeer, which means that thesteering wheel has to be turned more thanmight seem appropriate for the curvature of abend. This ensures good stability and reducesthe risk of rear wheel skid. Remember thatthese properties can alter with the vehicle load.The heavier the load in the trunk, the less thetendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressureall affect vehicle handling. Therefore, checkthat the tires are inflated to the recommendedpressure according to the vehicle load. See the"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-tributed so that capacity weight or maximumpermissible axle loads are not exceeded.

05 During your trip


05

��

197

Driving through water

• The vehicle can be driven through water upto a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm),at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

• Take particular care when driving throughflowing water.

• Clean the electrical connections for trailerwiring after driving in mud or water.

• When driving through water, maintain lowspeed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly onthe brake pedal to ensure that the brakesare functioning normally. Water or mud canmake the brake linings slippery, resulting indelayed braking effect.

CAUTION

• Engine damage will occur if water isdrawn into the air cleaner.

• If the vehicle is driven through waterdeeper than 10 in (25 cm), water mayenter the differential and the transmis-sion. This reduces the oil's lubricatingcapacity and may shorten the servicelife of these components.

• Do not allow the vehicle to stand inwater up to the door sills longer thanabsolutely necessary. This could resultin electrical malfunctions.

• If the engine has been stopped while thevehicle is in water, do not attempt torestart it. Have the vehicle towed out ofthe water.

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example whendriving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or withheavy loads, there is a risk that the engine andcooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-lows to avoid overheating the engine.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep hills.

• Do not turn the engine off immediatelywhen stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue tooperate (for up to 6 minutes) after the enginehas been switched off.

• Remove any auxiliary lights from in front ofthe grille when driving in hot weather con-ditions.

• Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpmif driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oiltemperature could become too high.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimizebattery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoidusing ignition mode II. Many electrical sys-tems (the audio system, the optional navi-gation system, power windows, etc) willfunction in ignition modes 0 and I. Thesemodes reduce drain on the battery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,accessories, etc., that consume a greatdeal of current when the engine is not run-ning could result in the battery being com-pletely drained.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehiclechecked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before driving long distances.

05 During your trip


05

198

Your retailer will also be able to supply you withbulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades foryour use in the event that problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should bechecked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and thatfuel consumption is normal.

• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage

• Have the transmission oil level checked.

• Check condition of drive belts.

• Check state of the battery's charge.

• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire aswell), and replace those that are worn.Check tire pressures.

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, andsteering gear should be checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.

• Reflective warning triangles are legallyrequired in some states/provinces.

• Have a word with a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician if you intend todrive in countries where it may be difficultto obtain the correct fuel.

• Consider your destination. If you will bedriving through an area where snow or iceare likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Cold weather precautions

If you wish to check your vehicle before theapproach of cold weather, the following adviceis worth noting:

• Make sure that the engine coolant contains50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixturewill reduce freeze protection. This givesprotection against freezing down to–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti-freeze is not approved by Volvo. Differenttypes of antifreeze must not be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuineVolvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – thishelps prevent the formation of condensa-tion in the tank. In addition, in extremelycold weather conditions it is worthwhile toadd fuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improvescold-weather starting as well as decreas-ing fuel consumption while the engine iswarming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-ticularly the synthetic type, is recom-mended. Be sure to use good quality oil butdo not use cold-weather oil for hard drivingor in warm weather, see page 276 for moreinformation on engine oil.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenance inter-vals except at owner request and at addi-tional charge.

• The load placed on the battery is greaterduring the winter since the windshield wip-ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.Moreover, the capacity of the batterydecreases as the temperature drops. Invery cold weather, a poorly charged bat-tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-fore advisable to check the state of chargemore frequently and spray an anti-rust oilon the battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tireson all four wheels for winter driving, seepage 254.

• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir fromfreezing, add washer solvents containingantifreeze. This is important since dirt isoften splashed on the windshield duringwinter driving, requiring the frequent use ofthe washers and wipers. Volvo WasherSolvent should be diluted as follows: Downto 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 partwasher solvent and 3 parts water Down to0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

05 During your trip


05

199

2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

• Avoid using de-icing sprays as they cancause damage to the locks.

05 During your trip

Refueling

05

200

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-oline to control engine deposits. Detergentgasoline is effective in keeping injectors andintake valves clean. Consistent use of depositcontrol gasolines will help ensure good driva-bility and fuel economy. If you are not surewhether the gasoline contains deposit controladditives, check with the service station oper-ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converterand must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. andCanadian regulations require that pumps deliv-ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-DED". Only these pumps have nozzles whichfit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasolinedamages the three-way catalytic converter andthe heated oxygen sensor system. Repeateduse of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and couldresult in loss of emission warranty coverage.State and local vehicle inspection programswill make detection of misfueling easier, pos-sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines containan octane enhancing additive called methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). If such fuels are used, your EmissionControl System performance may be affec-ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-tion indicator light) located on your instru-ment panel may light. If this occurs, pleasereturn your vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, checkwith the service station operator. To meet sea-

sonal air quality standards, some areas requirethe use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listedon page 201 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volumemay be used. Ethanol may also be referred toas Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practicecan result in vehicle performance deteriorationand can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-tem. Such damage may not be covered underthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

05 During your trip

Refueling

05

��

201

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G02

8920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-formance, but using 87 octane or above will notaffect engine reliability.

Volvo engines are designed to achieve ratedhorsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-formance using premium 91 octane fuel.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,or driving for extended periods at higher alti-tudes than normal, it may be advisable toswitch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or tochange gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel orchanging gasoline brands, it may be neces-sary to fill the tank more than once before adifference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as aknock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-trol systems on your vehicle, lead has beenstrongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.Unburned benzene has been strongly linked tocertain forms of cancer. If you live in an areawhere you must fill your own gas tank, takeprecautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler nozzlewhile refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vaporrecovery systems that fully seal the mouthof the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling afuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze duringwinter months, do not add solvents, thicken-ers, or other store-bought additives to yourvehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.Overuse may damage your engine, and someof these additives contain organically volatilechemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourselfto these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switchedon while refueling your vehicle. If the phonerings, this may cause a spark that couldignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire andinjury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaustgases. If you ever smell exhaust fumesinside the vehicle, make sure the passengercompartment is ventilated, and immediatelyreturn the vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correction.

05 During your trip

Refueling

05

202

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

G02

2914

The fuel filler door is located on the right rearfender (indicated by an arrow beside the fueltank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press the buttonon the lighting panel to unlock the fuel fillerdoor. Please note that the fuel filler door willremain unlocked until the vehicle begins tomove forward. An audible click will be heardwhen the fuel filler door relocks.

• If you intend to leave your vehicle while itis being refueled, this feature enables youto lock the doors/trunk while leaving thefuel filler door unlocked.

• You can also keep the vehicle locked if youremain inside it during refueling. The cen-tral locking button does not lock the fuelfiller door.

• Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructedand is completely closed after refueling.

• Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hotweather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a clickindicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.In addition to causing damage to theenvironment, gasolines containingalcohol can cause damage to paintedsurfaces, which may not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

G02

4631

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be openedmanually:

1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on thesame side as the fuel filler door).

2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.

3. Pull the cord straight rearward until the fuelfiller door clicks open.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

G02

2915

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open thefiller cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn-ing it clockwise until it clicks into place.

05 During your trip

Refueling

05

203

CAUTION

• Do not refuel with the engine running1.Turn the ignition off or to position I. If theignition is on, an incorrect reading couldoccur in the fuel gauge.

• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do notpress the handle on the filler nozzlemore than one extra time. Too much fuelin the tank in hot weather conditions cancause the fuel to overflow. Overfillingcould also cause damage to the emis-sion control systems.

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certainengine malfunctions, particularly involvingthe electrical, fuel or distributor ignitionsystems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Donot continue to operate your vehicle if youdetect engine misfire, noticeable loss ofpower or other unusual operating condi-tions, such as engine overheating or back-firing. A properly tuned engine will help

avoid malfunctions that could damage thethree-way catalytic converter.

• Do not park your vehicle over combustiblematerials, such as grass or leaves, whichcan come into contact with the hot exhaustsystem and cause such materials to igniteunder certain wind and weather condi-tions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess ofone minute), or an intermittently firing orflooded engine can cause three-way cata-lytic converter or exhaust system over-heating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthorizedmodifications to the engine, the EngineControl Module, or the vehicle may be ille-gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-verter or exhaust system overheating. Thisincludes: altering fuel injection settings orcomponents, altering emission systemcomponents or location or removing com-ponents, and/or repeated use of leadedfuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles withthree-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-gen content of the exhaust gases. Readingsare fed into a control module that continuouslymonitors engine functions and controls fuelinjection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engineis continuously adjusted for efficient combus-tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle'sperformance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

05 During your trip

Loading

05

204

Introduction

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by factors such as the number ofpassengers, the amount of cargo, the weightof any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat backr-ests can be folded down, See page 85.

When loading the trunk, keep the following inmind:

The trunk lid can be unlocked an pop-ped open slightly via the button

located on the lighting panel, see page 64.

• Load objects in the trunk against the back-rest whenever possible.

• Unstable loads can be secured to the loadanchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-ings to help keep them from shifting.

• Stop the engine and apply the parkingbrake when loading or unloading longobjects. The gear selector can be knockedout of position by long loads, which couldset the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

• Stop the engine, put the gear selector inP, and apply the parking brake whenloading or unloading long objects.

• The vehicle's driving characteristicsmay change depending on the weightand distribution of the load.

• A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces aforce of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in aheadon collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

• The rear seat should not be loaded to alevel higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below theupper edge of the rear side windows.Objects placed higher than this levelcould impede the function of the VolvoInflatable Curtain.

Load anchoring eyelets

G02

1462

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of thevehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to helpanchor items in the trunk.

05 During your trip

Loading

05

��


WARNING

• Cover sharp edges on long loads to helpprevent injury to occupants. Secure theload to help prevent shifting during sud-den stops.

• Always secure large and heavy objectswith a seat belt or cargo retainingstraps.

• Always secure the load to help preventit from moving in the event of suddenstops.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parkingbrake and put the gear selector in Pwhen loading and unloading the vehicle.

Grocery bag holder*

G02

1463

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bagsin place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

Ski hatch

There is a hatch in the right section of the rearseat backrest that can be opened for transpor-tation.

Fold the right backrest forward.

Release the hatch in the rear seat backrestby sliding the catch up while folding thehatch forward.

Return the backrest to the upright positionwith the hatch open.

Use the seat belt to prevent the load from mov-ing.

05 During your trip

Loading

05

206

WARNING

• Always secure the load to help preventit from moving in the event of suddenbraking.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parkingbrake and put the gear selector in Pwhen loading and unloading the vehicle.

NOTE

If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalintegrated booster cushion, fold it out first.

The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seathas no hinge. The cover must be removedbefore the ski hatch is used.

Removal:

� Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straightup.

Installation:

� Insert the cover in the grooves behind theupholstery and close the cover.

Roof loads

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-ries. Observe the following points when in use:

• To avoid damaging your vehicle and toachieve maximum safety when driving, werecommend using the load carriers thatVolvo has developed especially for yourvehicle.

• Volvo-approved removable roof racks aredesigned to carry the maximum allowableroof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

• Never exceed the rack manufacturer'sweigh limits and never exceed the maxi-mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

• Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loadsevenly.

• Place heavier cargo at the bottom of theload.

• Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-ate tie-down equipment.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured.

• Remember that the vehicle's center ofgravity and handling change when youcarry a load on the roof.

• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-sumption will increase with the size of theload.

• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fastcornering and hard braking.

05 During your trip

Towing a trailer

05

��

207

Introduction

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailerhitches that are specially designed for the vehi-cle.

NOTE

See page 274 for the maximum trailer andtongue weights recommended by Volvo.

• Observe the legal requirements of thestate/province in which the vehicles are

• All Volvo models are equipped withenergy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-ers. Trailer hitch installation should notinterfere with the proper operation of thisbumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present anyparticular problems, but take into considera-tion:

• Increase tire pressure to recommendedfull. See the tire inflation tables on pages249 and 250.

• When your vehicle is new, avoid towingheavy trailers during the first 620 miles(1,000 km).

• Maximum speed when towing a trailer:50 mph (80 km/h).

• Engine and transmission are subject toincreased loads. Therefore, engine coolanttemperature should be closely watched

when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-ditioner if the temperature gauge needleenters the red range.

• If the automatic transmission begins tooverheat, a message will be displayed inthe text window.

• Avoid overload and other abusive opera-tion.

• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-ity, and economy.

• It is necessary to balance trailer brakeswith the towing vehicle brakes to provide asafe stop (check and observe state/localregulations).

• Do not connect the trailer's brake systemdirectly to the vehicle's brake system.

• More frequent vehicle maintenance isrequired.

• Remove the ball and drawbar assemblywhen the hitch is not being used.

• Volvo recommends the use of syntheticengine oil when towing a trailer over longdistances or in mountainous areas.

WARNING

• Bumper-attached trailer hitches mustnot be used on Volvos, nor shouldsafety chains be attached to thebumper.

• Trailer hitches attaching to the vehiclerear axle must not be used.

• Never connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to the vehiclebrake system, nor a trailer's lightingsystem directly to the vehicle lightingsystem. Consult your nearest author-ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-tion.

• When towing a trailer, the trailer's safetywire must be correctly fastened to thehole or hook provided in the trailer hitchon the vehicle. The safety wire shouldnever be fastened to or wound aroundthe drawbar ball.

05 During your trip

Towing a trailer

05

208

NOTE

• When parking the vehicle with a traileron a hill, apply the parking brake beforeputting the gear selector in P. Alwaysfollow the trailer manufacturer's recom-mendations for wheel chocking.

• When starting on a hill, put the gearselector in D before releasing the park-ing brake. See also page 117 for moredetailed information about starting offon a hill while towing a trailer.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shiftpositions while towing a trailer, makesure the gear you select does not puttoo much strain on the engine (using toohigh a gear).

• The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch maybe rated for trailers heavier than thevehicle is designed to tow. Pleaseadhere to Volvo's recommended trailerweights.

• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines ofmore than 15 %.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailerhitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved byVolvo. Make sure the cable does not drag onthe ground.

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)

A

C

EDB

G01

0496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin fromthe locking bolt and slide the locking boltout of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the onein the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitchassembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the endof the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking boltand slide the locking bolt out of the ballholder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-bly.

NOTE

A cover for the hitch assembly is alsoincluded in the kit.

05 During your trip

Emergency towing

05

��

209

Towing eyelet

G02

1500

G02

1501

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the floor ofthe trunk, with the spare tire. This eyelet mustbe screwed into the positions provided on theright sides of either the front or rear bumper(see illustration).

CAUTION

If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not be usedto pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed.

NOTE

On certain models equipped with a trailerhitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwedinto the hole in the rear bumper. The towingrope should be attached to the trailer hitchinstead. For this reason, the detachablesection of the trailer hitch should be safelystowed in the vehicle at all times.

Attaching the towing eyelet

Use a coin to pry open the lower edge ofthe cover.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first byhand and then using the tire iron until it issecurely in place.

WARNING

Do not use the towing eyelets to pull thevehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyeletshould be removed and returned to its storagelocation.

� Press the cover for the attachment pointback into position.

WARNING

• Remember that the power brakes andpower steering will not function whenengine is not running. The braking andsteering systems will function but con-siderably higher pressure will berequired on the brake pedal and greatersteering effort must be exerted.

• The towing eyelets must not be used forpulling the vehicle out of a ditch or forany similar purpose involving severestrain. Do not use the towing eyelets topull the vehicle up onto a flat bed towtruck.

Precautions when the vehicle is in tow

• The steering wheel must be unlocked. Theremote key must be in the ignition slot1.

• Attach jumper cables (see page 109) toprovide current for releasing the optionalelectric parking brake and to move the gearselector from the P position.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the passenger compartment.

05 During your trip

Emergency towing

05

210

• The gear selector must be in position N.

• Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do notexceed the maximum allowable towingspeed.

• Maximum distance with front wheels onground: 50 miles (80 km).

• While the vehicle is being towed, try tokeep the tow rope taut at all times.

• The vehicle should only be towed in theforward direction.

NOTE

During towing, ignition mode II should beused so that the lighting can be switched on.

CAUTION

Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with thefront wheels off the ground should not betowed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) orfor distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).

CAUTION

• Please check with state and localauthorities before attempting this typeof towing, as vehicles being towed aresubject to regulations regarding maxi-mum towing speed, length and type oftowing device, lighting, etc.

• If the vehicle's battery is dead, do notattempt to start the vehicle by pushingor pulling it as this will damage thethree-way catalytic converter(s). Theengine must be jump started using anauxiliary battery (see page 109).

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to pull the vehicle up onto the flatbed or to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/

All Wheel Drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-ment.

• If wheel lift equipment must be used,please use extreme caution to help avoiddamage to the vehicle. In this case, the

vehicle should be towed with the rear

wheels on the ground if at all possible.

• If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehi-cle with the front wheels on the ground,

please refer to the towing information onpage 209.

CAUTION

• Sling-type equipment applied at thefront will damage radiator and air con-ditioning lines.

• It is equally important not to use sling-type equipment at the rear or apply lift-ing equipment inside the rear wheels;serious damage to the rear axle mayresult.

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.

05 During your trip

05

211

G020922

212

Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 214Maintaining your car............................................................................. 215Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 217Engine oil............................................................................................... 218Fluids..................................................................................................... 220Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 222Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 230Battery................................................................................................... 232Fuses..................................................................................................... 235Wheels and tires................................................................................... 244Vehicle care........................................................................................... 266Label information.................................................................................. 271Specifications........................................................................................ 273Volvo programs..................................................................................... 280

06MAINTENANCE AND SPECIF ICATIONS

06 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

06

214

Introduction

Volvo advises you to follow the maintenanceprogram outlined in the Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet. This mainte-nance program contains inspections and serv-ices necessary for the proper function of yourvehicle. The maintenance services containseveral checks that require special tools andtraining, and therefore must be performed by aqualified technician. To keep your Volvo in topcondition, specify time-tested and provenGenuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehiclemanufacturers to furnish written instructions tothe ultimate purchaser to assure the properservicing and function of the components thatcontrol emissions. These services, which arelisted in the "Warranty and Service RecordsInformation" booklet, are not covered by thewarranty. You will be required to pay for laborand material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspectionsbefore it was delivered to you, in accordancewith Volvo specifications. The maintenanceprocedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-ice Records Information booklet, many ofwhich will positively affect your vehicle's emis-sions, should be performed as indicated. It is

recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-sion maintenance be retained in case ques-tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-tion and maintenance should also be per-formed anytime a malfunction is observed orsuspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-dian regulations, the following list of warrantiesis provided.

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-tems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warran-ties are provided as required by state/provin-cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty andService Records Information booklet fordetailed information concerning each of thewarranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-cle running well. Your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet provides a com-

prehensive periodic maintenance schedule upto 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-tenance. The schedule includes componentsthat affect vehicle emissions. This pagedescribes some of the emission-related com-ponents.

Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systemsemploy computers that monitor, and sharewith each other, information about your vehi-cle's operation. One or more of these comput-ers may store what they monitor, either duringnormal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-crash event. Stored information may be readand used by:

• Volvo Car Corporation

• service and repair facilities

• law enforcement or government agencies

• others who may assert a legal right toknow, or who obtain your consent to knowsuch information.


Maintaining your car

06

��

215

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-vals are described in your vehicle's Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried outbetween the normally scheduled maintenanceservices.

Each time the car is refueled:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,headlights, and tail lights.

Monthly:

• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspectthe tires for wear.

• Check that engine coolant and other fluidlevels are between the indicated "min" and"max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glasscleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with a softcloth.

• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-minal connector, or a battery near the endof its useful service life. Consult your Volvoretailer for additional information.

As needed:

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, toreduce wear that can be caused by a buildupof dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by saltresidues.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents atthe base of the windshield, and from other pla-ces where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualifiedtechnicians is available online for purchaseor subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, thetwo jack attachments points should be used.

They are specially reinforced to bear the weightof the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placedunder the front of the engine support frame.Take care not to damage the splash guardunder the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi-tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.Always use axle stands or similar structures.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, thefront and rear lift arm pads should be centeredunder the reinforced lift plates on the inboardedge of the sill rail (see illustration).

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerizedengine management system. It stores diagnos-tic information about your vehicle's emissioncontrols. It can light the Check Engine light(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A"fault" is a component or system that is notperforming within an expected range. A faultmay be permanent or temporary. OBD II willstore a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to avehicle's OBD II system. The inspector canthen read "faults." In some states, this type of


Maintaining your car

06

216

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emissiontest.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-tion for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, yourvehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,but went out without any action on yourpart, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.Your vehicle may pass or fail, dependingon the inspection practices in your area.

• If you had recent service that required dis-connecting the battery, OBD II diagnosticinformation may be incomplete and "notready" for inspection. A vehicle that is notready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – orwas lit but went out without service, haveyour vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit CheckEngine light, or if you had service thatrequired disconnecting the battery, aperiod of driving is necessary to bring theOBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Ahalf-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

way driving is typically needed to allowOBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvoretailer can provide you with more infor-mation on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance withyour vehicle's maintenance schedule.


Hood and engine compartment

06

217

Opening and closing the hood

G01

0951

Pull the lever located under the left side ofthe dash to release the hood lock.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the releasecontrol (located under the right front edgeof the hood) to the left, and lift the hood

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly whenclosed.

Engine compartment, overview

G01

8945

The appearance of the engine compartmentmay vary depending on engine model.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filler cap for engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Air cleaner

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue tooperate (for up to 6 minutes) after the enginehas been switched off.

WARNING

The ignition should always be completelyswitched off before performing any opera-tions in the engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates atvery high voltages. Special safety precau-tions must be followed to prevent injury.Always turn the ignition off when:

• Replacing distributor ignition compo-nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

• Do not touch any part of the distributorignition system while the engine is run-ning. This may result in unintendedmovements and body injury.


Engine oil

06

218

Checking the engine oil

The oil level should be checked every time thevehicle is refueled. This is especially importantduring the period up to the first scheduledmaintenance service.

• See page 276 for oil specifications.

• Refer to the Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet for information on theoil change intervals.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

CAUTION

• Not checking the oil level regularly canresult in serious engine damage if the oillevel becomes too low.

• Oil that is lower than the specified qual-ity can damage the engine.

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofoil additives.

• Always add oil of the same type andviscosity as already used.

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. Thiscould cause an increase in oil consump-tion.

Checking and adding oil

G02

1734

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

• The car should be parked on a level sur-face when the oil is checked.

• If the engine is warm, wait for at least10 – 15 minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off before checking theoil.

G02

1737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and checkthe oil level. The level must be between theMIN and MAX marks.

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close tothe MIN mark, add approximately0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if nec-essary until the level is near the MAX mark.


Engine oil

06

219

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenance inter-vals except at owner request and at addi-tional charge. Please consult your Volvoretailer.


Fluids

06

220

Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

See page 278 for information on cooling sys-tem capacities.

CAUTION

• If necessary, top up the cooling systemwith Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreezeonly (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-freeze).

• Different types of antifreeze/coolantmay not be mixed.

• If the cooling system is drained, itshould be flushed with clean water orpremixed anti-freeze before it is refilledwith the correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

• The cooling system must always bekept filled to the correct level, and thelevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks. If it is not kept filled, therecan be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage.Check coolant regularly!

• Do not top up with water only. Thisreduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has alower boiling point. It can also causedamage to the cooling system if itshould freeze.

• Do not use chlorinated tap water in thevehicles cooling system.

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator cap while theengine is warm. Wait until the vehiclecools.

• If it is necessary to top off the coolantwhen the engine is warm, unscrew theexpansion tank cap slowly so that theoverpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under theround cover at the rear of the engine compart-ment. The round cover must be removed firstbefore the reservoir cap can be accessed.


Fluids

06

221

The brake fluid should always be between theMIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, thatthere is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-ing to the intervals specified in the Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

When driving under extremely hard conditions(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary toreplace the fluid more often. Consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake-relatedmessage is shown in the informationdisplay: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the cartowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

• Dot 4+ should never be mixed with anyother type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.The level must be between the MIN andMAX marks.

Power steering fluid

Check the level frequently. The fluid does notrequire changing. The fluid level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-ties and recommended fluid grade, seepage 278.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the powersteering system or if the vehicle has no elec-trical current and must be towed, it is stillpossible to steer the vehicle. However, keepin mind that greater effort will be required toturn the steering wheel.

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steeringfluid reservoir clean when checking.


Replacing bulbs

06


Introduction

All bulb specifications are listed on page 228.The following bulbs should only be replaced bya trained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian:

• Dome lighting

• Reading lights

• Glove compartment lighting

• Turn signals in the door mirror

• Approach lighting in the door mirror

• Brake/fog/taillights

• Rear side parking lights

• Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs

NOTE

For information regarding any other bulbsnot mentioned in this section, please con-tact your Volvo retailer or a trained andauthorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

• Active Bending Lights* – due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, thesebulbs should only be replaced by atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

• Turn off the lights and remove theremote key from the ignition beforechanging any bulbs.

Headlight housing

WARNING

• The engine should not be running whenchanging bulbs.

• When changing in the headlight hous-ing, if the engine has been running justprior to replacing bulbs, please beaware that components in the enginecompartment will be hot.

The entire headlight housing must be lifted outwhen replacing all front bulbs (except for thefog lights).

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-gers. Grease and oils from your fingersvaporize in the heat and will leave a depositon the reflector, which will damage it.


Replacing bulbs

06

��

223

NOTE

• Always switch off the ignition beforestarting to replace a bulb.

• The optional Active Bending Light bulbscontain trace amounts of mercury.These bulbs should always be disposedof by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

Removing the headlight housing

1. Switch off the ignition by pressing quicklyon the START/STOP ENGINE button andremove the remote key from the ignitionslot1.

2. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous-ing")

Withdraw the headlight housing's lock-ing pins.

Pull the headlight housing straight out .

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull onthe connector itself and not on the wiring.

3. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous-ing")

Unplug the wiring connector by holdingdown the clip with your thumb.

Pull out the connector with the otherhand.

4. Lift out the housing and place it on a softsurface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks intoplace.

2. Reinstall the headlight housing and lockingpins. Check that they are correctlyinserted. The headlight housing must beproperly inserted and secured in placebefore the lighting is switched on or theremote key is inserted into the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

Removing the cover to access theheadlights and parking lights

G02

1745

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, seepage 222.

1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it tothe side.

2. Press down the clips on the upper edge ofthe cover and remove it.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.


Replacing bulbs

06

224

Low beam, Halogen

G02

1746

1. Remove the headlight housing from thevehicle (see page 222).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the upper sec-tion of the retaining spring downward andto the side.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and reinsert it into theheadlight housing.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-stall the headlight housing.

High beam, Halogen

G02

1747


2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (seepage 223).

3. Pull the bulb holder out of the headlighthousing.

4. Turn the defective bulb counterclockwiseand pull it out of the socket.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until itsnaps into place. It can only be secured inone position.

6. Return the bulb holder into position in theheadlight housing.


Extra high beam2

G02

1748



3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holderdownward.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until itsnaps in place. It can only be inserted inone way.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.


Replacing bulbs

06

��

225

6. Return the bulb holder into position in theheadlight housing.


Parking lights

G02

1749



3. To access the bulb, first remove the highbeam bulb.

4. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder.

5. Remove the burned out bulb and install anew one. It can only be secured in oneposition.

6. Press the bulb holder into the socket andpress until it clicks into place.


Turn signals

G02

1750


2. Remove the round cover by pulling the tabuntil the cover comes off.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing itin slightly and turning out before pulling itout. Press a new bulb into the socket.


6. Press the cover until it clicks into position.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Side marker lights

G02

1751

NOTE



2. Remove the round cover.

3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder.

4. Pull out the burned out bulb and install anew one. It can only be secured in oneposition.


Replacing bulbs

06

226


6. Press the cover until it clicks into position.

Front fog lights

G02

1753

1. Remove the cover by pressing in the clipsand pulling straight out.

2. Unscrew the fog light housing screw andpull it out.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

4. Install a new bulb by turning clockwise.

5. Press the bulb into the holder. (The profileof the bulb holder corresponds to the pro-file of the foot of the bulb.)

6. Reinstall the bulb holder. The TOP mark onthe bulb holder must always be upward.

7. Put the cover back into place.

Location of taillight bulbs

G02

1755

Taillight lens, right side

Parking lights (LED)

Turn signals

Side maker lights (LED)

Brake lights

Rear fog light (driver’s side only)

Backup light

NOTE

If an error message remains in the displayafter a faulty bulb has been replaced, con-tact an authorized Volvo workshop.

G01

5418

Taillight bulb holder, right side

Turn signal

Brake lights

Rear fog light (driver’s side only)

Backup light


Replacing bulbs

06

��

227

Taillight housing

G02

1754

The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replacedfrom inside the trunk (not the LED functions).

NOTE


1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel toaccess the bulbs. The bulbs are located inseparate bulb holders.

2. Press the catches together and pull out thebulb holder.

3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it inslightly and turning it before pulling it out.

4. Plug in the connector.

5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks intoplace and reinstall the cover.

License plate lighting

G02

1756

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housingand pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the entire bulb housing and screw itinto place.

Footwell lighting

G02

1757

1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of thelens closest to the tunnel console (the cen-ter of the vehicle) and turn gently so thatthe lens comes loose. (Applies to bothlights).

2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.


4. Press the lens back into place.


Replacing bulbs

06

228

Trunk lighting

G02

1758

NOTE


The trunk lighting is located on opposite sidesof the trunk.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so thatthe bulb housing comes loose.


3. Check that the bulb illuminates and pressit back into the bulb housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

G02

1759

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the loweredge, in the center, turn and carefully pryup the lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edgeon the left and right sides (by the blackrubber sections), and pry carefully so thatthe glass comes loose in the lower edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entiremirror glass and cover.


Reinstalling the mirror glass

1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-ror glass back into position.

2. Press the three lower lugs back into posi-tion.

Specification, bulbs

Lightingfunction

Output/volt-age (W)

Bulb

Active Bend-ing Lights(extra highbeam)

55 H7

Low beam(halogen)

55 H7

High beam(halogen)

65 H9

Rear fog light 21 P21W

Brake lights 21 P21W

Backup lights 21 P21W

Rear turn sig-nals

21 PY21W

Front turn sig-nals

21 H21W

Front foglights

35 H8


Replacing bulbs

06

229

Lightingfunction

Output/volt-age (W)

Bulb

Footwell light-ing, trunklighting,license platelighting

5 FestoonbulbSV5.5

Vanity mirror 1.2 FestoonbulbSV5.5

Front parkinglights

5 W5W

Front sidemarker lights

5 W5W

Glove com-partmentlighting

5 FestoonbulbSV8.5


Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

230

Wiper blades

The windshield wiper blades are differentlengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longerthan the one on the passenger side.

Service position

The wiper blades must be in the service (verti-cal) position for replacement or washing.

1. Switch off the ignition (ignition mode 0, seepage 80) and keep the remote key in theignition slot1.

2. Move the right steering wheel lever up andhold it for at least 1 second. The wipers willthen move to the vertical position on thewindshield.

The wipers will return to the normal positionwhen the vehicle is started.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

With the wipers in the service position, foldout the wiper arm from the windshield.Press the button on the wiper blade attach-ment and pull the wiper blade straight out,parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicksinto place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades cleanhelps improve visibility and prolongs the serv-ice life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiperblades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarmsoap solution or car washing detergent.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.


Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

231

Filling washer fluid

G02

1764

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share acommon reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on thedriver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filledwith windshield washer solvent containingantifreeze. For capacities, see page 278.


Battery

06

232

Warning symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open flames,and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in anenvironmentally responsible manner. Con-sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery toa recycling station.

Handling

• Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running (for example, whenreplacing the battery).

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not driven foran extended period of time or if the vehicleis usually only driven short distances.

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-tery.

WARNING

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.

Maintenance

• Use a screw driver to open the caps orcover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The levelshould never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if thebattery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap over eachbattery cell or the cover is securely inplace.

• Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and properly tightened.


Battery

06

��

233

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running, or when the key is in theignition. This could damage the vehicle'selectrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected fromthe vehicle when a battery charger is useddirectly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condition,the vehicle should be driven for at least 15minutes a week or connected to a chargerwith an automatic charging function.

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.Keeping the battery fully charged helpsprolong its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not driven foran extended period of time or if the vehicleis usually only driven short distances.

•

CAUTION

• Always use distilled or deionized water(battery water).

• Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Changing

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive andnegative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal

Switch off the ignition and wait at least5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so


Battery

06

234

that all information in the vehicle's electricalsystem can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover andremove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that therear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from thebattery

Loosen the screw holding the batteryclamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING



Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.G

0217

71

2. Move the battery inward and to the sideuntil it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Screw in the battery with the screw in theclamp.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the cold section moulding. (SeeRemoval).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it withthe clips. (See Removal).


Fuses

06

��


Replacing fuses

There are relay/fuse boxes located in theengine compartment, the passenger compart-ment, and the trunk.

If an electrical component fails to function, thismay be due to a blown fuse. The easiest wayto see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficultto remove, special fuse removal tools arelocated on the inside of the fuse box cov-ers.

2. From the side, examine the curved metalwire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of thesame color and amperage (written on the fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electricalsystem inspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higheramperage than those stated on the follow-ing pages. Doing so could seriously damageor overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Location of the fuse boxes

G02

1772

Under the glove compartment

Engine compartment

Trunk

Center console (S80 Executive* only)


Fuses

06

236

Engine compartment


Fuses

06

��


Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-partment box. Fuses in are located under

.

NOTE

• Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may bechanged at any time when necessary.

• Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/circuit breakers and should only beremoved or replaced by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• There is a special fuse removal tool onthe underside of the cover.

Function A

Circuit breaker 50

Circuit breaker 50

Circuit breaker 60

Circuit breaker 60

Function A

Circuit breaker 50

–

–

–

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system blower 40

–

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

–

Active Bending Lights. Head-light leveling*

10

Central electrical module 20

Radar. ACC control module* 5

Speed related power steering 5

Function A

Engine Control Module (ECM),transmission, SRS

10

Heated washer nozzles 10

Vacuum pump I5T 20

Lighting panel 5

Headlight washers 15

12-volt socket, front and rearseat

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE)*

15

Moonroof*, ceiling console/ECC*

10

Engine compartment box 5

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module (ECM) 10

Control module, automatictransmission

15

Compressor A/C 15


Fuses

06

238

Function A

Coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module (ECM),throttle

10

Injection system 15

Engine valves 10

EVAP/heated oxygen sensor/Injection

15

Water pump (V8)

Crank case ventilation heater

10

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

-

Cooling fan 80


Fuses

06

��


Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the iupholstery covering the fusebox.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions

Function A

Rain sensor* 5

SRS system 10

ABS brakes. Electric parkingbrake

5

Function A

Accelerator pedal, heatedseats*

7.5

–

ICM display, CD & Radio 15

Steering wheel module 7.5

–

High beam 15

Function A

Moonroof 20

Backup lights 7.5

–

Front fog light* 15

Windshield washers 15

Adaptive cruise control ACC* 10

–


Fuses

06


Function A

Overhead courtesy lighting,Control panel driver's door/Power passenger seat*

7.5

Information display 5

Power driver's seat* 5

– -

Remote key receiver, Alarmsensors

5

Fuel pump 20

Electric steering column lock 20

–

Lock, tank/trunk 10

Alarm siren. ECC 5

START/STOP ENGINE button 5

Brake light switch 5


Fuses

06

��

241

In the center consol – S80 Executive only

NOTE

If the fuse listed below needs to bereplaced, please consult a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

Pos Function A

Analogue clock 5


Fuses

06


Trunk

G03

2920

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left side of the trunk

Positions

Module A (black). Func-tion

A

Switches in driver's door 25

Switches in passenger's door 25

Switches in rear door, driver'sside

25

Switches in rear door, pas-senger's side

25


A

–

12-V socket in the trunks,refrigerator (S80 Executiveonly)

15

Rear window defroster 30

Folding rear head restraints* 15


A

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power driver's seat* 25

Trailer socket 1* 40

-


Fuses

06


Module B (white). Func-tion

A

Front seat massage, arm restlights, refrigerator*

5

Active chassis system controlmodule*

15

Heated driver's seat* 15

Heated passenger's seat* 15

Rear seat heater, passenger'sside*

15

AWD control module 10

Rear seat heater, driver'sside*

15

Folding head restraints 15

Power passenger's seat * 25

Keyless drive* 20

Electric parking brake – driv-er's side

30

Electric parking brake – pas-senger's side

30

Module D (blue). Func-tion

A

Navigation system display* 10

–

–

SIRIUS satellite radio* 5

Audio amplifier 25

Audio system 15

–

– reserve


Wheels and tires

06

244

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires accordingto the vehicle's tire information placard on theB-pillar (the structural member at the side ofthe vehicle, at the rear of the driver's dooropening), or on the inside of the fuel filler dooron Canadian models.

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with anUltra High Performance tire and wheel com-bination designed to provide maximum drypavement performance with considerationfor hydroplaning resistance. As such, theymay be more susceptible to road hazarddamage and, depending on driving condi-tions, may achieve a tread life of less than20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi-cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWDor DSTC system, these tires are notdesigned for winter driving, and should bereplaced with winter tires when weatherconditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-tics and offer good handling on dry and wetsurfaces. It should be noted however that thetires have been developed to give these fea-tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Certain models are equipped with "all-season"tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tireswithout the "all-season" rating. However, foroptimum road holding on icy or snow-coveredroads, we recommend suitable winter tires onall four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tiresare the same size designation, type (radial) andpreferably from the same manufacturer, on allfour wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of alteringthe car's roadholding and handling characte-ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. Asof 2000, the manufacturing week and year(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502 meansthat the tire illustrated was manufactured dur-ing week 15 of 2002).

G02

1823

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climates, frequenthigh loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)exposure can accelerate the aging process.

You should replace the spare tire when youreplace the other road tires due to the aging ofthe spare.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOTstamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discolorationshould be replaced immediately.

Improving tire economy

• Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tirepressure tables, see pages 249 and 250.

• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hardbraking and tire screeching.

• Tire wear increases with speed.

• Correct front wheel alignment is veryimportant.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economyand driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction ofrotation throughout their lifetime.

• When replacing tires, the tires with themost tread should be mounted on the rear


Wheels and tires

06

��

245

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteerduring hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage thetires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G02

1778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of thetire

• When switching between summer andwinter tires, mark the tires to indicatewhere they were mounted on the car, e.g.,LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in only onedirection are marked with an arrow on thesidewall.

• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car'sbraking properties and ability to forceaside rain, snow and slush.

• The tires with the most tread should alwaysbe at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-ding).

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you areunsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mountedon rims), they should be suspended off thefloor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored ontheir sides or standing upright, but should notbe suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,dry, dark place, and should never be storedin close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,etc.

WARNING

• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvoare specified to meet stringent stabilityand handling requirements. Unap-proved wheel/tire size combinationscan negatively affect your vehicle's sta-bility and handling. Approved tire sizesare shown in the tire inflation pressuretables on pages 249 and 250.

• Any damage caused by installation ofunapproved wheel/tire size combina-tions will not be covered by your newvehicle warranty. Volvo assumes noresponsibility for death, injury, orexpenses that may result from suchinstallations.

Tire wear

Tire rotation

Tire wear is affected by a number of factorssuch as tire inflation, ambient temperature,driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainlyby the front tires, which will wear faster.

If the tires are rotated, they should only bemoved from front to back or vice versa. Theyshould never be rotated left to right/right to left.

However, tire rotation, done at the recom-mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep


Wheels and tires

06

246

tread wear as even as possible and will helpyou get maximum mileage from your tires.

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the firsttime after approximately 3,000 miles(5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile(10,000 km) intervals.

Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height isabove 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE

Tire rotation is not included in regularlyscheduled maintenance and is performedonly at customer request, at additionalcharge.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidancebased on your particular driving circumstan-ces.

Tread wear indicator

G02

1829

The tires have wear indicator strips runningacross or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. Whenapproximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on thetread, these strips become visible and indicatethat the tire should be replaced. Tires with lessthan 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommendedthat the tire be identical in type (radial) and sizeas the one being replaced. Using a tire of thesame make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Tire inflation

G03

2521

Tire inflation placard on U.S. models

Tire inflation

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-sure for your vehicle can be found on pages249 and 250. A tire inflation pressure placardis also located on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehicle, atthe rear of the driver's door opening). This plac-ard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as loadlimits and inflation pressure.


Wheels and tires

06

��

247

NOTE

• The placards shown indicate inflationpressure for the tires installed on thevehicle at the factory only.

• A certain amount of air seepage fromthe tires occurs naturally and tire pres-sure fluctuates with seasonal changesin temperature. Always check tire pres-sure regularly.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflationpressure, including the spare, at least oncea month and before long trips. You arestrongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-sure gauge, as automatic service stationgauges may be inaccurate.

• Use the recommended cold inflation pres-sure for optimum tire performance andwear.

• Under-inflation or over-inflation may causeuneven treadwear patterns.

NOTE

A certain amount of air seepage from thetires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluc-tuates with seasonal changes in tempera-ture. Always check tire pressure regularly.

WARNING

• Under-inflation is the most commoncause of tire failure and may result insevere tire cracking, tread separation,or "blow-out," with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury.

• Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-rying capacity of your vehicle.

G03

2522

Tire inflation placard on Canadian models

When weather temperature changes occur, tireinflation pressures also change. A 10-degreetemperature drop causes a correspondingdrop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Checkyour tire pressures frequently and adjust themto the proper pressure, which can be found on

the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-cation label.

Checking tire pressure

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when thetires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after thevehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to behot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-tance to pump your tire(s), check and recordthe tire pressure first and add the appropriateair pressure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tiresare hot from driving and it is normal for pres-sures to increase above recommended coldpressures. A hot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could be significantlyunder-inflated.


Wheels and tires

06

248

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,then firmly press the tire gauge onto thevalve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended airpressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-ing the spare.

5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure thereare no nails or other objects embeddedthat could puncture the tire and cause anair leak.

6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there areno gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-ities.

NOTE

• If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the valve. Then recheck the pressurewith your tire gauge.

• Some spare tires require higher inflationpressure than the other tires. Consultthe tire inflation tables or see the infla-tion pressure placard.

Tire specifications

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-low:

Load ratings

91 1365 lbs (615 kg)

93 1433 lbs (650 kg)

99 1709 lbs (755 kg)

See also page 251 for an explanation of thedesignations on the sidewall of the tire.


Wheels and tires

06

��

249

Tire inflation pressure table – U.S. models

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installedon your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

6-cylinder models

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

245/40 R18

35/240 35/240

V8 models

245/45 R 17

35/240 35/240

V8 models

245/40 R18

36/250 36/250

T 125/80 R 17 61/420 61/420


Wheels and tires

06

250

Tire inflation pressure table – Canadian models

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installedon your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

Front

psi/kPa

Rear

psi/kPa

6-cylinder models

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

38/260 38/260 32/220 32/220

6-cylinder models

245/40 R 18

38/260 38/260 33/230 33/230

V8 models

245/45 R 17

38/260 38/260 32/220 32/220

V8 models 38/260 38/260 35/240 35/240

T 125/80 R 17 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420


Wheels and tires

06

��

251

Tire designations

310

11

12

4

5 6 7 89

2

1G

0107

53

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturersplace standardized information on the sidewallof all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tiresidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-ignation is an example only and that thisparticular tire may not be available on yourvehicle.

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Thelarger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.

3. R: Radial tire.

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (ininches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, aload index of 95 equals a maximum load of1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximumspeed at which the tire is designed to bedriven for extended periods of time, carry-ing a permissible load for the vehicle, andwith correct inflation pressure. For exam-ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph(210 km/h).

NOTE

This information may not appear on the tirebecause it is not required by law.

7. M+S or M/

S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain,AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"and indicates that the tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbers or lettersare the plant code where it was manufac-tured, the next two are the tire size codeand the last four numbers represent theweek and year the tire was built. For exam-ple, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001.The numbers in between are marketingcodes used at the manufacturer's discre-tion. This information helps a tire manufac-turer identify a tire for safety recall purpo-ses.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-cates or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.Tire manufacturers also must indicate theply materials in the tire and the sidewall,which include steel, nylon, polyester, andothers.

10. Maximum

Load: Indicates the maximum load inpounds and kilograms that can be carriedby the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire infor-mation placard located on the B-Pillar forthe correct tire pressure for your vehicle.


Wheels and tires

06

252

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: See page 254 for more informa-tion.

12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure:the greatest amount of air pressure thatshould ever be put in the tire. This limit isset by the tire manufacturer.

Glossary of tire terminology

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,radial tubeless, etc.

• Tire information placard: A placardshowing the OE (Original Equipment) tiresizes, recommended inflation pressure,and the maximum weight the vehicle cancarry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-ber on the sidewall of each tire providinginformation about the tire brand and man-ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-ufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of theamount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-ric tires designed to carry a maximum loadat 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressure beyondthis pressure will not increase the tires loadcarrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metrictires designed to carry a heavier maximumload at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metrictires]. Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will not increase thetire's load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-sure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standardunit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the sideof the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire nextto the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between thebead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-eter of the tire that contacts the road whenmounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire ora tire and tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicatingthe maximum load in pounds and kilo-grams that can be carried by the tire. Thisrating is established by the tire manufac-turer.

• Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. Thislimit is set by the tire manufacturer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:inflation pressure, established by Volvo,which is based on the type of tires that aremounted on a vehicle at the factory. Thisinflation pressure is affected by the numberof occupants in the vehicle, the amount ofcargo, and the speed at which the vehiclewill be driven for a prolonged period. Thisinformation can be found on the tire infla-tion placard(s) located on the driver's sideB-pillar and in the tire inflation table in thischapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to becold when they have the same temperatureas the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-perature is normally reached after the vehi-cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

Vehicle loading

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determining yourvehicle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-tion placard:


Wheels and tires

06

��

253

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or optional equip-ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. When towing,trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargoweight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer tothe section "Towing a trailer", seepage 207.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front or rear). Thesenumbers are shown on the Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-gers.

NOTE

• The location of the various labels in yourvehicle can be found on page 271.

• A table listing important weight limits foryour vehicle can be found on page274.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual1 to determinehow this reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,gross vehicle weight, or any otherweight rating limits can cause tire over-heating resulting in permanent defor-mation or catastrophic failure.

• Do not use replacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than the tiresthat were original equipment on thevehicle because this will lower the vehi-cle's GVW rating. Replacement tireswith a higher limit than the originals donot increase the vehicle's GVW ratinglimitations.

1 See "Introduction" on page 207.


Wheels and tires

06

254

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and many depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variation in drivinghabits, maintenance practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance. The trac-tion grade assigned to this tire is based onbraking (straight-ahead) traction tests and isnot a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are AA (the highest),A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a minimum level of performance thatall passenger vehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and tire failure.

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo withthe following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on frontwheels only. Use only Volvo approvedsnow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tiresand wheels are installed and are of a sizedifferent than the original tires and wheels,chains in some cases CANNOT be used.Sufficient clearances between chains andbrakes, suspension and body componentsmust be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interferewith brake components and thereforeCANNOT be used.

• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chainsshould only be installed on the frontwheels.


Wheels and tires

06

��

255

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snowchain information.

CAUTION

• Check local regulations regarding theuse of snow chains before installing.

• Use single-sided snow chains only.

• Always follow the chain manufacturer'sinstallation instructions carefully. Installchains as tightly as possible andretighten periodically.

• Never exceed the chain manufacturer'sspecified maximum speed limit. (Underno circumstances should you exceed31 mph (50 km/h).

• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turnswhen driving with snow chains.

• The handling of the vehicle can beadversely affected when driving withchains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as wellas locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires2

Tires for winter use:

• Owners who live in or regularly commutethrough areas with sustained periods ofsnow or icy driving conditions are strongly

advised to fit suitable winter tires to helpretain the highest degree of traction.

• It is important to install winter tires on allfour wheels to help retain traction duringcornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-ure to do so could reduce traction to anunsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as thiscould also negatively affect overall tire roadgrip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roadsin warm weather. They should be removedwhen the winter driving season has ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) duringwhich the vehicle should be driven assmoothly as possible to give the studs theopportunity to seat properly in the tires.The tires should have the same rotationaldirection throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-tions restricting the use of studded wintertires before installing such tires.

Temporary Spare

The spare tire in your vehicle3 is called a "Tem-porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placardon the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) shouldbe maintained irrespective of which position onthe vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new onecan be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-porary replacement for a punctured tire. Itmust be replaced as soon as possible by astandard tire. Road holding and handlingmay be affected with the "TemporarySpare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheelsof different dimensions or with a spare tireother than the one that came with the vehi-cle. The use of different size wheels canseriously damage your car's transmission.

2 Where permitted3 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.


Wheels and tires

06

256

Changing a wheel

G01

4341

Location of jack and tools

Spare wheel

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is onlyintended for temporary use. Replace the sparewheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.The car's handling may be altered by the useof the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure forthe spare wheel is stated in the tire pressuretables on pages 249 and 250.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem-porary replacement for a punctured tire. Itmust be replaced as soon as possible by astandard tire. Road holding and handlingmay be affected with the “TemporarySpare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven with morethan one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheelwell with the rim side down. There are two foamblocks, one under the spare wheel and oneover/inside. The upper one contains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the sparewheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Open the floor hatch.

3. Undo the retaining bolt.

4. Lift out the foam block with tools.

5. Lift out the spare wheel.

The other two blocks can remain in the wheelwell.

After use

The foam block and spare wheel must bereplaced in the reverse order. Note the arrowon the upper foam block. It should point for-ward.

Removing the wheel cover

Changing a tire:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Put the gear selector in P.

3. Block the wheels that are on the groundwith wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-ble) using the lug wrench in the toolbag.With the vehicle still on the ground,use the lug wrench to loosen the wheel


Wheels and tires

06

��

257

nuts 1/2 – 1 turns by exerting downwardpressure.

5. Turn the nuts counterclockwise to loosen.

G01

7465

6. There are two jack attachment points oneach side of the vehicle. Position the jackcorrectly in the attachment (see illustrationabove) and crank while simultaneouslyguiding the base of the jack to the ground.The base of the jack must be flat on a level,firm, non-slippery surface. Before raisingthe vehicle, check that the jack is still cor-rectly positioned in the attachment.

7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to bechanged is lifted off the ground.

8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely andcarefully remove the wheel so as not todamage the threads on the studs.

WARNING

• The jack must correctly engage the jackattachment.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.

• Never allow any part of your body to beextended under a vehicle supported bya jack.

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen changing a tire. For any other job,use stands to support the vehicle.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the Park (P) position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be damaged.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheeland hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

G02

2916

Tighten the lug nuts

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-nately tighten the bolts crosswise to103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).


Wheels and tires

06


Tire Sealing System*

G01

4340

Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealingsystem that enables you to temporarily seal ahole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, acontainer for the sealing compound, wiring toconnect the system to the vehicle’s electricalsystem via one of the 12-volt sockets, and ahose used to connect the system to the tire’sinflation valve.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the fronttunnel console and on the rear side of the cen-ter console in the rear seat, see page 191.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under thefloor of the trunk. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.2. Remove the screw holding the tire sealing

system's retaining bracket.3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

• The tire sealing system is only intendedto seal holes on the tire’s tread area, notthe sidewall.

• Tires with large holes or tears cannot berepaired with the tire sealing system.

• After use, stow the tire sealing systemproperly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

• After using the tire sealing system, thevehicle should not be driven farther thanapproximately 120 miles (200 km).

• Have the tire inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible to determine if it canbe permanently repaired or must bereplaced.

• The vehicle should not be driven fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tirethat has been temporarily repaired withthe tire sealing system.

• After using the tire sealing system, drivecarefully and avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers and sudden stops.


Wheels and tires

06

��

259

Tire sealing system–overview

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mindwhen using the tire sealing system:

• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 inthe illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanoland natural rubber-latex. These sub-stances are harmful if swallowed.

• The contents of this bottle may causeallergic skin reactions or otherwise bepotentially harmful to the skin, the cen-tral nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Do not ingest the contents.

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith the skin.

• Hands should be washed thoroughlyafter handling.

First aid:

• Skin: Wash affected areas of skin withsoap and water. Get medical attentionif symptoms occur.

• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least15 minutes, occasionally lifting theupper and lower eyelids. Get medicalattention if symptoms occur.

• Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.If irritation persists, get medical atten-tion.

Tire sealing system–temporarilyrepairing a flat tire

G01

4338

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in twostages:


Wheels and tires

06

260

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumpingsealing compound into the tire. The car isthen driven a short distance to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,etc.) from the tire before using the sealingsystem.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure ischecked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

• Never leave the tire sealing systemunattended when it is operating.

• Keep the tire sealing system away fromchildren.

• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely offthe road and away from moving traffic.

• Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix itto the steering wheel hub where it will beclearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound maycause skin irritation. If contact occurs, washthe affected area immediately with soap andwater.

4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottleholder and unscrew the cap on the bottleof sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keepit securely in place and help prevent sealingcompound leakage. Once in place, the bot-tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-tem’s hose connector onto the valve astightly as possible by hand.

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

8. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used to avoidbattery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicleis parked in a well ventilated place, or out-doors, before using the system.

9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressorby pressing the on/off switch to position I.


Wheels and tires

06

��

261

WARNING

• Never stand next to the tire being inflatedwhen the compressor is in operation.

• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,switch off the compressor immediately.

• If there is visible damage to the sidewallor the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.The vehicle should not be driven if thisoccurs. Contact a towing service orVolvo On Call Roadside Assistance ifapplicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarilyshow an increase in pressure to approxi-mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-pound is being pumped into the tire. Thepressure should return to a normal levelafter approximately 30 seconds.

10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire tobetween 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switchoff the compressor briefly to get a clearreading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,turn off the compressor. In this case, thehole is too large to be sealed and the vehicleshould not be driven.

11. Switch off the compressor and disconnectthe electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speedof 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS), theuse of the sealing compound may lead toincorrect tire pressure readings or in rarecases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.Use the tire sealing system to check andadjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

• Safely stow the tire sealing system in aconvenient place as it will soon be usedagain to check the tire’s inflation pres-sure.

• The empty bottle of sealing compoundcannot be removed from the bottleholder. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician to have thebottle removed and properly disposedof.


Wheels and tires

06

262

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steeringbehavior, or noises should occur while driv-ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in asafe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,cracks, or other visible damage, andrecheck its inflation pressure. If the pressureis below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continuedriving. Have the vehicle towed to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor thecorrect inflation pressure. If the tire needsto be inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor. If necessary, release air fromthe tire by turning the air release knobcounterclockwise.

CAUTION


WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1hour, check the inflation pressure in thedamaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must bereplaced if:

• the tire sealing system has been used torepair a tire

• the container’s expiration date has passed(see the date on decal).

NOTE

• After use, the sealing compound bottle,the hose, and certain other systemcomponents must be replaced. Pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer for replace-ment parts.

• If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-ration date has passed, please take it toa Volvo retailer or a recycling stationthat can properly dispose of harmfulsubstances.

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflatethe tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the hose connectoronto the valve as tightly as possible byhand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

• The vehicle’s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be surethe vehicle is parked in a well ventilatedplace, or outdoors, before using the sys-tem.

• Children should never be left unattendedin the vehicle when the engine is running.


Wheels and tires

06

��

263

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on thegauge. Switch off the compressor briefly toget a clear reading from the pressuregauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs tobe inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor (press the on/off switch toposition I). If necessary, release air from thetire by turning the air release knob coun-terclockwise.

CAUTION


9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/offswitch to position 0) when the correct infla-tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the12-volt socket.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)–U.S models only

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen-sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmitinflation pressure data to a receiver located inthe vehicle.

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMSwill light up the tire pressure warning light( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in theinstrument panel and will display one of thefollowing messages in the text window: LOW

TIRE PRESS. CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW

TIRE PRESSURE.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressurewarning light will flash for approximately1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYSTSERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-


Wheels and tires

06

264

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. When the mal-function indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but doesnot replace normal tire maintenance. Forinformation on correct tire pressure, pleaserefer to the Tire inflation pressure tables orconsult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message hasbeen displayed, and the tire pressure warninglight has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure(consult the tire pressure placard or thetables on pages 249 and 250.

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary todrive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. Thiswill erase the warning text and the warninglight will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tirefailure, resulting in a loss of control of thevehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing orreplacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:

• Only the factory-mounted wheels areequipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporaryspare tire, this tire does not have a TPMSsensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYSTSERVICE REQUIRED will be displayedeach time the vehicle is driven above25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,the warning message should not reappear.If the message is still displayed, drive thevehicle for several minutes at a speed of20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase themessage.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors befitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.Volvo does not recommend moving sen-sors back and forth between sets ofwheels.


Wheels and tires

06

265

NOTE

• If you change to tires with a differentrecommended inflation pressure, theTPMS system must be recalibrated tothese tires. This must be done by atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

• If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-sor's seal, nut, and valve core should bereplaced.

• When installing TPMS sensors, thevehicle must be parked for at least15 minutes with the ignition off. if thevehicle is driven within 15 minutes, aTPMS error message will be displayed.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, pressthe pump's mouthpiece straight onto thevalve to help avoid bending or otherwisedamaging the valve.


Vehicle care

06

266

Washing the car

WARNING

Be sure that the compressor is not con-nected to a 12-volt socket while replacingthe container.

The following points should be kept in mindwhen washing and cleaning the car:

• The car should be washed at regular inter-vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spotsadhere to the paint and may cause dam-age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-ularly important to wash the car frequentlyin the wintertime.

• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.Doing so may cause detergents and waxto dry out and become abrasive. To avoidscratching, use lukewarm water to softenthe dirt before you wash with a softsponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintworkas soon as possible. Otherwise the finishmay be permanently damaged.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate thesoftening of dirt and oil.

• Dry the car with a clean chamois andremember to clean the drain holes in thedoors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tar removerafter the car has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapywater can be used to clean the wiperblades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-shield and wiper blades improves visibilityconsiderably and also helps prolong theservice life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheelhousings, fenders, etc).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-quent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to removedirt from the drain holes in the doors andsills.

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

CAUTION

• During high pressure washing, thespray mouthpiece must never be closerto the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do notspray into the locks.

• Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights canreduce lighting capacity considerably.Clean the headlights regularly, forexample when refueling.

Special moonroof cautions:

• Always close the moonroof and sunshade before washing your vehicle.

• Never use abrasive cleaning agents onthe moonroof.

• Never use wax on the rubber sealsaround the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaningproducts, available at your Volvo retailer, forcleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamentalcomponents such as chromed strips on theexterior of your vehicle. The instructions forusing these products should be followed care-fully. Solvents or stain removers should not beused.


Vehicle care

06

��

267

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

Automatic car wash

• We do NOT recommend washing your carin an automatic wash during the first sixmonths (because the paint will not havehardened sufficiently).

• An automatic wash is a simple and quickway to clean your car, but it is worthremembering that it may not be as thor-ough as when you yourself go over the carwith sponge and water. Keeping the under-body clean is most important, especially inthe winter. Some automatic washers donot have facilities for washing the under-body.

CAUTION

• Before driving into an automatic carwash, turn off the optional rain sensor toavoid damaging the windshield wipers.

• Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that anyantenna(s) are retracted or removed.Otherwise there is risk of the machinedislodging them.

• Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated wheels using the same deter-gents used for the body of the vehicle.Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents canpermanently stain chrome-platedwheels.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is driven immediatelyafter being washed, apply the brakes,including the parking brake, severaltimes in order to remove any moisturefrom the brake linings.

• Engine cleaning agents should not beused when the engine is warm. Thisconstitutes a fire risk.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on theinside of the lenses of exterior lights such asheadlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

mal and the lights are designed to withstandmoisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-pate after the lights have been on for a shorttime.

Polishing and waxing

• Normally, polishing is not required duringthe first year after delivery, however, wax-ing may be beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehiclemust be washed and dried. Tar spots canbe removed with kerosene or tar remover.Difficult spots may require a fine rubbingcompound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

• Several commercially available productscontain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-ishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based waxes canbe purchased today. These waxes are easyto use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the bodyworkagainst oxidation, road dirt and fading.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in directsunlight (the surface of the vehicle shouldnot be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).


Vehicle care

06

268

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-life or durable paint protection coatings,some of which may claim to prevent pitting,fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings havenot been tested by Volvo for compatibilitywith your vehicle's clear coat. Some of themmay cause the clear coat to soften, crack,or cloud. Damage caused by application ofpaint protection coatings may not be cov-ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. Formore difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabricstain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with asoft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufacturedwith a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down theprotection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, andfading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasyleather care kit formulated to clean and beau-tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew theprotective qualities of its finish. The cleanerremoves dirt and oil buildup. The light creamprotectant restores a barrier against soil andsunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener thatshould be applied after the cleaner and pro-tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, andreduces friction between leather and other fin-ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting andconditioning your vehicle's leather two to fourtimes a year. Ask your Volvo retailer aboutLeather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp spongeand squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving thesponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with thesponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or atowel, and allow the leather to dry com-pletely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream ona cloth and apply a thin coating of creamto the upholstery with light circular move-ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining andprotect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.


Vehicle care

06

��

269

CAUTION

• Under no circumstances should gaso-line, naphtha or similar cleaning agentsbe used on the plastic or the leathersince these can cause damage.

• Take extra care when removing stainssuch as ink or lipstick since the coloringcan spread.

• Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-vent can damage the seat padding.

• Start from the outside of the stain andwork toward the center.

• Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in apocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothingmay damage the textile upholstery.

• Clothing that is not colorfast, such asnew jeans or suede garments, may stainthe upholstery.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mildsoap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushedclean regularly, especially during winter whenthey should be taken out for drying. Spots ontextile mats can be removed with a mild deter-

gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components shouldbe done with a cleaning agent speciallydesigned for this purpose. Consult your Volvoretailer.

Touching up paintwork

Paint code on the model plate1

Paint damage requires immediate attention toavoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finishregularly, for instance washing the vehicle.Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment andskill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten-sive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by usingVolvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The colorcode number is stated on the model plate.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

• Primer – can

• Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush

• Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the baremetal and an undamaged color coat remains,you can add paint immediately after removingdirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should beclean and dry. The surface temperatureshould be above 60 °F (15 °C).

1 see page 271 for the location of the model plate.


Vehicle care

06

270

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down tothe metal and an undamaged layer of paintremains, the touch-up paint can be applied assoon as the spot has been cleaned.

Repairing stone chips

G02

1832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-aged surface. Pull the tape off so that anyloose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it witha small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paintcan be applied using a brush. Mix the paintthoroughly; apply several thin paint coatsand let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may wantto protect surrounding paint by masking itoff

5. After a few days, polish the touched-upareas. Use a soft rag and a small amountof polish.


Label information

06

��

271

Location of labels


Label information

06

272

List of labels

Model

plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).Codes for color and upholstery, etc.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meetall applicable safety standards, as evi-denced by the certification label on thedriver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear ofthe driver's door opening). For further infor-mation regarding these regulations, pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer.

Loads and Tire

Pressures. The appearance of the decalwill vary, depending on the market forwhich the vehicle is intended. See alsopage 246.

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the topleft surface of the dashboard. The VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) should alwaysbe quoted in all correspondence concern-ing your vehicle with the retailer and whenordering parts.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-cable emission standards, as evidenced bythe certification label on the underside ofthe hood. For further information regardingthese regulations, please consult yourVolvo retailer.


Specifications

06

��

273

Dimensions–S80/S80 Executive

Position Dimension in (mm)

A Wheelbase 111.6 (2835)

B Length 191 (4851)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 75.9 (1927)

D Load length, floor 43.1 (1094)

E Height 58.8 (1493)

F Load height 14.5 (368)

G Track, front 62.5 (1588)


Specifications

06

274

Position Dimension in (mm)

H Track, rear 62.4 (1585)

I Load width, floor 44.5 (1130)

J Width 73.3 (1861)

K Width, incl. door mirrors 82.9 (2106)

Weights

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 4820 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 5020 lbs

8-cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs

S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 5020 lbs

S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 5110 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 2190 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2280 kg

8-cyl. AWD: 2320 kg

S80 Executive 6 cyl. turbo AWD: 2280 kg

S80 Executive 8 cyl. AWD: 2320 kg

Capacity weight 6-cyl. FWD: 905 lbs

6-cyl. Turbo AWD: 890 lbs

8-cyl. AWD: 890 lbs



6-cyl. FWD: 410 kg


8-cyl. AWD: 400 kg




Specifications

06

��

275

Category USA Canada

Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs




6-cyl. FWD: 1220 kg

6-cyl. AWD turbo: 1250 kg

8-cyl. AWD: 1300 kg



Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2270 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs




6-cyl. FWD: 1030 kg


8-cyl. AWD: 1080 kg



Curb weight 3790–4040 lbs

S80 Executive: 3970–4040 lbs

1655–1845 kg

S80 Executive: 1810–1850 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel DriveB AWD = All Wheel Drive


Specifications

06

276

Engine specifications

Specification/Model

3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0T V8

Engine designation B6324S B6324S2 B6304T2 B8444S

Output (kW/rps) 175/103 168/103 210/93 232/99

Output (hp/rpm) 235/6200 225/6200 281/5600 311/5950

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/57 400/25 – 80 440/66

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3400 295/1500 – 4800 325/3950

No. of cylinders 6 6 6 8

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82 3.7/94

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2 3.13/79.5

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 4.4 liters (269.4 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1 10.4:1

Engine oil

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSACspecification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.Lower quality oils may not offer the same fueleconomy, engine performance, or engine pro-tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Depending on your driving habits, premium orsynthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvoretailer for recommendations on premium orsynthetic oils.

Oil additives must not be used.

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenance services.

This oil is only used at customer request, atadditional charge. Please consult your Volvoretailer.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine lifeunder normal use. SAE 5W-30 will providegood fuel economy and engine protection. Seethe viscosity chart.


Specifications

06

��

277

G02

3491

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40and complying with oil quality requirements are

recommended for driving in areas of sustainedtemperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-longed driving in mountainous areas.

American Petroleum Institute (API)

symbol

G02

2917

The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided intothree parts:

• The upper section describes the oil's per-formance level.

• The center identifies the oil's viscosity.

• The lower section indicates whether the oilhas demonstrated energy-conservingproperties in a standard test in comparisonto a reference oil.

Oil volume

Engine model Oil volume between MIN andMAX

Volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S/S2 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T2 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)

V8 B8444S 1.0 US qts (1.1 liters) 7.4 US qts (7.0 liters)


Specifications

06

278

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters) Transmission fluid BOT 341

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitormixed with water (50/50 mix), seepackaging.3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)

V8 10.7 US qts. (10.2 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.8 lbs (800 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a),PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSSM2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)

Use a washer antifreeze recom-mended by Volvo, mixed withwater.

Fuel tank volume 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.B Models without headlight washers


Specifications

06

279

Electrical system

General information

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-nator. Single pole system in which the chassisand engine block are used as conductors. Thenegative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery

Engine 3.26-cyl./3.0T

V8

Voltage (V) 12 12

Cold startcapacity (A)

520-700 600-800

Reserve capacity(min)

100-135 120-160

WARNING



CAUTION

If the battery is replaced, replace it with abattery of the same cold start capacity andreserve capacity as the original (see thedecal on the battery).


Volvo programs

06

280

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ONCALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-tion, features, and benefits are described in aseparate information package in your glovecompartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-ports certification by the National Institute forAutomotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-fied technicians have demonstrated a highdegree of competence in specific areas.Besides passing exams, each technician mustalso have worked in the field for two or moreyears before a certificate is issued. These pro-fessional technicians are best able to analyzevehicle problems and perform the necessarymaintenance procedures to keep your Volvo atpeak operating condition.


06

281

07 Index

07

282

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets........................................ 191

A

ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 114

Accessory installation warning.................. 10

Active chassis system............................. 158

Active yaw control................................... 156

Adaptive cruise control.................... 167, 169

Airbagsdisconnecting the front passenger’sside................................................. 24, 25front...................................................... 20inflatable curtain................................... 30side impact........................................... 28

Air conditioning........................................ 130

Air distribution.......................................... 127

Air distribution table................................. 132

Air vents................................................... 128

All Wheel Drive......................................... 113

Anti-freeze....................................... 198, 220

Anti-lock brake system............................ 114warning light......................................... 74

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 114

Approach lighting................................ 54, 95

Audio systemaudio functions................................... 134CD player/changer.............................. 144HD digital radio................................... 138overview.............................................. 133radio functions.................................... 135Sirius satellite radio............................ 141sound settings.................................... 134steering wheel keypad........................ 133USB/iPod connector........................ 136

Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 101

Automatic locking retractor....................... 35

Automatic transmissionGeartronic................................... 111, 112general description..................... 111, 112oil........................................................ 278shiftlock override................................ 112

Axle weight.............................................. 252

B

Batterychanging............................................. 233maintenance............................... 232, 233remote key, replacing........................... 57specifications...................................... 279warning symbols................................. 232

Black box............................................. 9, 214

Blind Spot Information System(BLIS)....................................... 185, 186, 187

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 147

Booster cushions....................................... 42

Brake lights................................................ 92

Brake systemchecking fluid level............................. 220emergency brake assistance.............. 115fluid..................................................... 278general information............................. 114warning light......................................... 76

Bulbsfootwell lighting................................... 227headlights........................... 222, 223, 224introduction......................................... 222license plate lights.............................. 227side marker lights............................... 225

07 Index

07

283

specifications...................................... 228trunk lighting....................................... 228

C

Capacity weight....................................... 252

Catalytic converter................................... 203

CD player/changer................................... 144

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 147

Central locking system, introduction......... 52

Chains...................................................... 254

Check engine light..................................... 74

Child restraintsrecalls and registration......................... 45

Child restraint systems.............................. 36booster cushions.................................. 42convertible seats.................................. 40infant seats........................................... 38ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 43top tether anchors................................ 44

Child safety.......................................... 34, 35booster cushions.................................. 42child restraint systems.......................... 36convertible seats.................................. 40infant seats........................................... 38

Child safety locks...................................... 48

Climate system........................................ 130air distribution............................. 127, 132air vents.............................................. 128Interior Air Quality System.................. 127introduction......................................... 126passenger compartment filter............ 127refrigerant........................................... 126

Clockanalogue............................................... 78

Clock, setting............................................. 78

Cold weather driving................................ 198

Collision warning system......................... 161

Compass in rearview mirror..................... 155

Conserving electrical current................... 197

Convertible seats....................................... 40

Coolant............................................ 220, 278

Cooling system, general information....... 197

Courtesy lighting........................................ 94

Crash mode............................................... 33

Cruise control.................................. 159, 160adaptive.............................................. 167

Curb weight............................................. 252

Current, conserving................................. 197

D

Defroster.................................................. 130

Detachable key blade................................ 57

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-bag....................................................... 24, 25

Dome lighting............................................. 94

Door mirrors............................................. 100

Driver distraction warning.......................... 10

Driving economically................................ 196

Driving in cold weather............................ 198

Driving through water.............................. 197

E

ECC......................................... 129, 130, 131

Economical driving.................................. 196

Electric parking brake.............................. 116

Electronic Climate Control....... 128, 130, 131air distribution table............................ 132Interior Air Quality System.................. 131ventilated seats................................... 129

Emergency brake lights............................. 92

Emergency locking retractor...................... 35

07 Index

07

284

Emergency starting.................................. 109

Emergency towing........................... 209, 210

Emission inspection readiness................ 215

Engineoverheating........................................... 76specifications...................................... 276starting................................................ 107switching off....................................... 109

Engine compartment overview................ 217

Engine oilchecking............................................. 218low pressure warning light.............. 75, 76specifications...................................... 276volumes.............................................. 277

Environment............................................... 11

Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 204

F

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 214

Fluid specifications.................................. 278

Fog lightsfront...................................................... 75front/rear............................................... 92

Four C (active chassis system)................ 158

Front airbags.............................................. 20disconnecting passenger’s side air-bag.................................................. 24, 25

Front fog lights..................................... 75, 92

Front park assist.............................. 182, 184

Front seats..................................... 82, 84, 87heated................................................. 129lumbar support (S80 Executive only).... 87massage function (S80 Executive only) 87moving passenger's seat (S80 Execu-tive only)................................................ 88

Fuel filler cap........................................... 202

Fuel filler door, opening........................... 202

Fuel level warning light.............................. 75

Fuel requirements............................ 200, 201

Fuel tank volume..................................... 278

Fuses............................... 235, 236, 239, 242

G

Gasoline requirements............................. 201

Gas tank volume...................................... 278

Gauges...................................................... 73

Geartronic................................................ 112

Geartronic automatic transmission.. 111, 112

Generator warning light............................. 76

Glossary of tire terminology..................... 252

Grocery bag holder.................................. 205

Gross vehicle weight............................... 252

H

Hazard warning flashers............................ 93

HD digital radio........................................ 138

HeadlightsActive Bending Lights........................... 91changing bulbs........................... 223, 224high/low beams.................................... 90high beam flash.................................... 90

Headlight washers..................................... 97

Heartbeat sensor (alarm system)......... 55, 56

Heated front seats................................... 129

Heated oxygen sensors........................... 203

Heated rear seats.................................... 129

High beams................................................ 90indicator light........................................ 75

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 215

Home safe lighting..................................... 94

07 Index

07

285

Hood, opening/closing............................ 217

Horn........................................................... 89

I

Ignition modes........................................... 80

Immobilizer.......................................... 52, 53

Important information.................................. 8

Indicator lights......................... 73, 74, 75, 76

Infant seats................................................ 38

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 30

Inflation pressure............................. 246, 247

Inflation pressure tables.................. 249, 250

Information lights..................... 73, 74, 75, 76

Information symbol.................................... 75

Inspection readiness................................ 215

Instrument lighting..................................... 90

Instrument overview............................ 72, 73

Instrument panel...................................... 124

Interior Air Quality System....................... 127

Interior lighting........................................... 94

iPod connector (audio system)............. 136

ISOFIX anchors.......................................... 43

J

Jackattaching............................................. 256location of........................................... 256

Jump starting........................................... 109

K

Key blade............................................. 52, 57

Keyless drivegeneral description............................... 60starting the vehicle............................. 107

L

Labelslist of................................................... 272location of........................................... 271

LATCH anchors......................................... 43

Leather care............................................. 268

Lighting panel............................................ 90

Load anchoring eyelets........................... 204

Loading the vehicle.......................... 204, 252roof loads............................................ 206

Locking the vehicle.................................... 54

Locks, child safety..................................... 48

Low beams................................................ 90

Low fuel level warning light........................ 75

Low oil pressure warning light................... 76

M

Main instrument panel............................. 124

Maintenance............................................ 214hoisting the vehicle............................. 215performed by the owner..................... 215

Malfunction indicator light......................... 74

Menu system........................................... 122overview.............................................. 122

Messages in the instrument panel........... 124

Mirrorsdefroster............................................. 101power door......................................... 100rearview, auto-dim function................ 101

07 Index

07

286

retractable........................................... 100vanity.................................................. 191

Moonroof................................................. 102

Motor oilchecking............................................. 218specifications...................................... 276volumes.............................................. 277

O

Occupant safety........................................ 14

Occupant weight sensor...................... 24, 25

Octane recommendations....................... 201

Odometer, trip........................................... 78

Oilspecifications...................................... 276volumes.............................................. 277

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 280

Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 94

Overheating, engine................................... 76

Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 203

P

Paint, touching up.................................... 269

Park assist....................................... 182, 184

Parking brakeelectric, applying/releasing................. 116warning light......................................... 76

Parking lights............................................. 91changing bulbs................................... 225

Personal Car Communicator, unique func-tions........................................................... 55

Polishing.................................................. 267

Power front seatmemory function................................... 83with keyless drive................................. 84

Power mirrors.......................................... 100defroster............................................. 101

Power moonroof...................................... 102

Power steeringfluid..................................................... 221speed-dependent............................... 158

Power steering fluid................................. 278

Power windows......................................... 98laminated glass..................................... 99

Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 18

PROPOSITION 65 WARN-ING..................................... 11, 109, 234, 279

R

RadioSirius satellite radio............................ 141

Radio functions........................................ 135HD digital radio................................... 138

Rain sensor................................................ 96

READ button............................................ 124

Rear fog light............................................. 92

Rear park assist............................... 182, 184

Rear seatsfolding................................................... 85heated................................................. 129

Rearview mirrorauto-dim function............................... 101compass............................................. 155

Rear window defroster............................ 101

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 45

Refrigerant............................................... 278

Refrigerator (S80 Executive only)............ 192

07 Index

07

287

Refueling.......................................... 200, 201fuel filler cap....................................... 202fuel filler door...................................... 202fuel tank volume................................. 278

Registering child restraints........................ 45

Remote key................................................ 52approach lighting.................................. 54immobilizer..................................... 52, 53key blade........................................ 52, 57key memory.......................................... 52locking the vehicle................................ 54Personal Car Communicator.......... 54, 55replacing the battery............................. 57unlocking the vehicle............................ 54

Remote key/PCCcommon functions................................ 54

Reporting safety defects............................ 15

Roadside Assistance............................... 280

Roof loads............................................... 206

S

S80 Executiveanalogue clock..................................... 78front seat lumbar support..................... 87front seat massage function................. 87

glasses................................................ 192moving the front passenger's seat....... 88refrigerator.......................................... 192

Safety, occupant........................................ 14

Safety defects, reporting........................... 15

Seat beltreminder................................................ 17

Seat beltsAutomatic locking retractor/Emergencylocking retractor.................................... 35buckling................................................ 16maintenance......................................... 16pretensioners........................................ 16reminder................................................ 16reminder warning light.......................... 76securing child restraint sys-tems.......................................... 38, 40, 42unbuckling............................................ 16use during pregnancy........................... 18using..................................................... 16

Seats, front.................................... 82, 83, 87

Side door mirrors..................................... 100

Side impact airbags................................... 28

Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 225

Sirius satellite radio.................................. 141

Snow chains............................................ 254

Snow tires................................................ 254

Sound settings, audio system................. 134

Spare tire................................................. 255

Speed-dependent steering...................... 158

Spin control............................................. 156

SRS............................................................ 19

Stability system....................................... 156indicator light........................................ 75

Starting the engine.................................. 107with keyless drive............................... 107

Starting the vehicleafter a crash (crash mode).................... 33

Start inhibitor (immobilizer).................. 52, 53

Steering wheeladjusting............................................... 89horn....................................................... 89keypad.................................. 89, 122, 133

Stone chips, touching up......................... 269

Storage spaces........................................ 189

Studded tires........................................... 254

Sunroof (moonroof).................................. 102

Sun shade.................................................. 99

Supplemental restraint system.................. 19warning light......................................... 76

07 Index

07

288

T

Temporary spare tire............................... 255

Three-way catalytic converter................. 203

Tire designations..................................... 251

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 263, 264indicator light........................................ 75

Tires......................................................... 244age...................................................... 244changing from summer to winter........ 245glossary of terms................................ 252improving economy............................ 244inflation pressure........................ 246, 247inflation pressure tables............. 249, 250rotation............................................... 245snow................................................... 254spare................................................... 255specifications...................................... 248storing................................................. 245studded............................................... 254tire pressure monitoring system......... 263tread wear indicator............................ 246uniform tire quality grading................. 254

Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-tems).......................................................... 44

Touching up paint.................................... 269

Towing a trailer................................ 207, 208trailer hitch.......................................... 208

Towing the vehicle........................... 209, 210

Traction control........................................ 156

Trailer towing................................... 207, 208trailer hitch.......................................... 208

Transmissiongeneral description..................... 111, 112oil........................................................ 278shiftlock override................................ 112

Tread wear indicator................................ 246

Trip computer.......................................... 153

Trip odometers.......................................... 78

Trips, long distance................................. 197

Trunkchanging bulbs................................... 228driving with it open............................. 196

Turn signals............................................... 93changing bulbs................................... 225indicator lights...................................... 75

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 254

Unlocking the vehicle................................ 54

Upholstery care....................................... 268

V

Vanity mirror............................................ 191changing bulbs................................... 228

Vehicle Event Data............................... 9, 214

Vehicle loading................................ 204, 252roof loads............................................ 206

Vehicle maintenance................................ 214performed by the owner..................... 215

Vehicle weights........................................ 274

Ventilated seats....................................... 129

Volvo and the environment........................ 11

Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 30

Volvo maintenance.................................. 214

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 280

Volvo programs....................................... 280

07 Index

07

289

W

Warning flashers, hazard........................... 93

Warning lights.......................... 73, 74, 75, 76

Warning symbol......................................... 77

Warning system, collision........................ 161

Warranties................................................ 214

Washer fluid..................................... 231, 278

Washersheadlight............................................... 97windshield............................................. 96

Water, driving through............................. 197

Waxing..................................................... 267

Weights.................................................... 274

Wheels..................................................... 244changing............................................. 256storing................................................. 245

Whiplash Protection System..................... 31

Windowspower.................................................... 98

WindshieldIR coating............................................. 97rain sensor............................................ 96washers................................................ 97wipers/washers..................................... 96

Windshield washer fluid................... 231, 278

Windshield wipers.................................... 230

Wiper bladesreplacing windshield wipers............... 230

07 Index

07

290

�� !��"��#��$��%�&'��

Documents

VOLVO S80 Owner's manual - Volvo Carsnew.volvocars.com/.../2010_S80/2010S80OwnersManual.pdf · Introduction Important information 9 this manual may not be available in all mar-kets